Sony XAV-70BT Operating instructions

Sony XAV-70BT Operating instructions
4-164-314-71 (1)
AV Center
AV Center
Operating Instructions
XAV-70BT
©2010 Sony Corporation
GB
Be sure to install this unit in the dashboard of
the car for safety. For installation and
connections, see the supplied installation/
connections manual.
Warning
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not
expose the unit to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the
cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this product
will increase eye hazard. As the laser beam used
in this CD/DVD player is harmful to eyes, do not
attempt to disassemble the cabinet. Refer
servicing to qualified personnel only.
This label is located on the bottom of the
chassis.
Note on the lithium battery
Do not expose the battery to excessive heat such as
direct sunlight, fire or the like.
2
Warning if your car’s ignition has no
ACC position
Be sure to set the Auto Off function
(page 50).
The unit will shut off completely and
automatically in the set time after the unit is
turned off, which prevents battery drain.
If you do not set the Auto Off function, press
and hold (SOURCE/OFF) until the display
disappears each time you turn the ignition off.
To cancel the demonstration (Demo) display,
see page 53.
Table of Contents
Notes on safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Notes on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Notes on Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Playable discs and symbols used in this
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Location and function of controls . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Card remote commander RM-X170 . . . . . . 12
Getting Started
Resetting the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Advanced Operations — Discs
Using PBC functions — Playback control . . . 22
Configuring audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the audio language/format . . . . .
Changing the audio channel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the audio output level
— Dolby D level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
23
23
23
Locking discs — Parental control. . . . . . . . . . 24
Activating parental control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Changing the area and its movie rating
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat and shuffle play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Direct search play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Performing initial settings. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Preparing the card remote
commander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Basic Operations
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Advanced Operations — Radio
Storing and receiving stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Storing automatically — BTM . . . . . . . . . . 21
Storing manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Receiving stored stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting PTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Setting CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
USB Device Operations
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Repeat and shuffle play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Enjoying music according to your mood
— SensMe™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Before using the SensMe™ function . . . . . 27
Installing “SensMe™ Setup” and “Content
Transfer” in your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Registering a USB device using “SensMe™
Setup” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Transferring tracks to the USB device using
“Content Transfer” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing tracks in the channel
— SensMe™ channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing tracks in the mood map
— SensMe™ mood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
iPod Operations
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Setting the play mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Repeat and shuffle play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operating an iPod directly
— Passenger control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
continue to next page t
3
Useful Functions
Sound Adjustment
Listing up tracks/images/video files
— List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting a track/image/video file . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting a file type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting the sound quality — EQ7 . . . . . . . . 44
Customizing the equalizer curve
— EQ7 Tune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Searching a track by listening to track passages
— ZAPPIN™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using Gesture Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Handsfree Calling and Audio
Streaming — Bluetooth
Before using the Bluetooth function . . . . . . . .34
Basic procedure of the Bluetooth
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Bluetooth status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installing the external microphone
XA-MC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Searching from this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Searching from the Bluetooth device . . . . . 36
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Handsfree calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Receiving calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Operations during a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Phonebook management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Storing phonebook data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Browsing a phonebook in a cellular
phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deleting phonebook data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Editing a contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Call data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Call history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Preset dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Locking the personal information . . . . . . . . 43
Adjusting the sound characteristics . . . . . . . . . 45
Optimizing sound for the listening position
— Intelligent Time Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Precisely calibrating the listening position
— Intelligent Time Alignment Tune . . . . . 46
Speaker configuration and volume setup . . . . 46
Creating a virtual center speaker
— CSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using rear speakers as subwoofer
— RBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adjusting the speaker volume. . . . . . . . . . . 47
Monitor Adjustment
Adjusting the monitor angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Touch panel calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting the background screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Selecting the picture quality
— Picture EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Customizing the picture quality . . . . . . . . . 48
Selecting the aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings
Basic setting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DVD and other playback settings . . . . . . . . . . 54
Audio streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Listening to a Bluetooth device through
this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Operating the Bluetooth device with
this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setting the security code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bluetooth settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Auxiliary audio/video equipment . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using Optional Equipment
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Rear view camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4
Additional Information
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Notes on LCD panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Notes on discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playback order of MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/
DivX®/MPEG-4 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About WMA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About AAC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About JPEG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About DivX video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About DivX Video-on-Demand . . . . . . . . . 61
About MPEG-4 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
About Bluetooth function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Removing the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Error displays/messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Language code/area code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Support site
If you have any questions or for the latest support information on this
product, please visit the web site below:
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
Provides information on:
• Models and manufacturers of compatible digital audio players
• Models and manufacturers of compatible cellular phones and the FAQ
about Bluetooth function
5
Notes on safety
• Comply with your local traffic rules, laws and
regulations.
• While driving
– Do not watch or operate the unit, as it may lead
to distraction and cause an accident. Park your
car in a safe place to watch or operate the unit.
– Do not use the setup feature or any other
function which could divert your attention from
the road.
– When backing up your car, be sure to
look back and watch the surroundings
carefully for your safety, even if the rear
view camera is connected. Do not
depend on the rear view camera
exclusively.
• While operating
– Do not insert your hands, fingers or foreign
object into the unit while functioning, as it may
cause injury or damage to the unit.
– Keep small articles out of the reach of children.
– Be sure to fasten seatbelts to avoid injury in the
event of a sudden movement of the car.
Preventing an accident
Pictures appear only after you park the car and set
the parking brake.
If the car starts moving during video playback,
the picture is automatically switched to the
background screen after displaying the caution
below.
“Video blocked for your safety.”
The monitor connected to the REAR VIDEO
OUT is active while the car is in motion.
The picture on the display is switched to the
background screen, but audio source can be
heard.
Do not operate the unit or watch the monitor
while driving.
6
Notes on installation
• We recommend this unit should be installed by a
qualified technician or service personnel.
– If you try to install this unit by yourself, see the
supplied installation/connections manual and
install the unit properly.
– Improper installation may cause battery drain or
a short circuit.
• If the unit does not work properly, check the
connections first, referring to the supplied
installation/connections manual. If everything is in
order, check the fuse.
• Protect the unit surface from damage.
– Do not expose the unit surface to chemicals,
such as insecticide, hair spray, insect repellent,
etc.
– Do not leave rubber or plastic materials in
contact with the unit for a long time. Otherwise,
the finish of the unit may be impaired, or
deformation may occur.
• When installing, be sure to fix securely.
• When installing, be sure to turn the ignition off.
Installing the unit with the ignition on may cause
battery drain or a short circuit.
• When installing, be sure not to damage any car
parts such as pipes, tubes, fuel tank or wiring by
using a drill, as it may cause a fire or an accident.
Copyrights
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows
Vista and Windows Media and
logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
“DVD VIDEO,” “DVD-R,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,”
and “DVD+RW” are trademarks.
®
Music recognition technology and related data are
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2010 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other
patents issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks
of Gracenote.
This product uses font data which is licensed to
Sony by Monotype Imaging Inc. or its affiliates.
®
DivX , DivX Certified and
associated logos are registered
trademarks of DivX, Inc.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Sony Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
ZAPPIN is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
12 TONE ANALYSIS and its
logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
“WALKMAN” and
“WALKMAN” logo are
registered trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
SensMe and the SensMe logo are
trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sony Ericsson
Mobile Communications AB.
Apple, Macintosh and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA
TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND
COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
7
Notes on Bluetooth
Caution
IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY BE LIABLE FOR
ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR OTHER
DAMAGES INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF
THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED
EQUIPMENT, DOWNTIME, AND
PURCHASER’S TIME RELATED TO OR
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
PRODUCT, ITS HARDWARE AND/OR ITS
SOFTWARE.
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
Safe and efficient use
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly
approved by Sony may void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Please check for exceptions, due to national
requirement or limitations, in usage of Bluetooth
equipment before using this product.
Driving
Check the laws and regulations on the use of cellular
phones and handsfree equipment in the areas where
you drive.
Always give full attention to driving and pull off the
road and park before making or answering a call if
driving conditions so require.
Connecting to other devices
When connecting to any other device, please read its
user guide for detailed safety instructions.
Radio frequency exposure
RF signals may affect improperly installed or
inadequately shielded electronic systems in cars,
such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic
antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed
control systems or air bag systems. For installation
or service of this device, please consult with the
manufacturer or its representative of your car. Faulty
installation or service may be dangerous and may
invalidate any warranty that may apply to this
device.
Consult with the manufacturer of your car to ensure
that the use of your cellular phone in the car will not
affect its electronic system.
Check regularly that all wireless device equipment
in your car is mounted and operating properly.
8
Emergency calls
This Bluetooth car handsfree and the electronic
device connected to the handsfree operate using
radio signals, cellular, and landline networks as well
as user-programmed function, which cannot
guarantee connection under all conditions.
Therefore do not rely solely upon any electronic
device for essential communications (such as
medical emergencies).
Remember, in order to make or receive calls, the
handsfree and the electronic device connected to the
handsfree must be switched on in a service area with
adequate cellular signal strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular
phone networks or when certain network services
and/or phone features are in use.
Check with your local service provider.
Playable discs and symbols used in this manual
This unit can play various video/audio discs.
The following chart helps you to check if a disc is supported by this unit, as well as what functions are
available for a given disc type.
Disc symbol in manual
Disc format
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO
DVD-R*1 / DVD-R DL*1 / DVD-RW*1
(Video mode/VR mode)
DVD+R*1 / DVD+R DL*1 / DVD+RW*1
AUDIO
Video CD
(Ver. 1.0/1.1/2.0)
Audio CD
CD-ROM*2 / CD-R*2 / CD-RW*2
*1 Audio files can also be stored.
*2 Video/image files can also be stored.
Note
“DVD” may be used in this manual as a general term for DVD VIDEOs, DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs, and DVD+Rs/
DVD+RWs.
The following chart shows the supported compression formats and their file types.
Available functions differ depending on the format, regardless of disc type. The format symbols below
appear next to the description of functions available for that format.
Format symbol in manual
File type
MP3 audio file
WMA audio file
AAC audio file
JPEG image file
DivX® video file
MPEG-4
MPEG-4 video file
Tip
For details on compression formats, see page 60.
Note
Even compatible discs may not be playable on this unit, depending on their recorded condition.
9
Location and function of controls
Main unit
1
VOL
2
TOP
3
Refer to the pages listed for details.
A Disc slot (located behind the front panel)
page 17
B VOL (Volume) –/+* buttons
C Receptor for the card remote
commander
D Display window/touch panel
E Reset button page 14
F
10
(Bluetooth) signal indicator
page 35
4 56
SOURCE
OFF
7 8
9
G TOP button
To open the top menu.
H SOURCE/OFF button
Press to turn on the power/change the source:
“Tuner” (Radio), “Disc,” “AUX” (Auxiliary
equipment), “USB/iPod,” “BT Audio”
(Bluetooth Audio).
Press for 1 second to turn off the power.
Press for more than 2 seconds to shut off
completely.
I Z (Open/Close) button page 17
* The VOL + button has a tactile dot.
A “Source List” key
To open the source list.
Screen displays
When no source is selected:
1
2
Source List
Top
B “Top” key
To open the top menu.
C Clock display page 53, 57
D
(Close) key
To close the menu.
E “ATT” (Attenuate) key*
To attenuate the sound. To cancel, touch
again.
12:00
3
Top menu:
4
5
6 7
ATT
M.OFF
F
(Setting) key
To open the setting menu.
G “M.OFF” (Monitor off) key
To turn off the monitor and the button
illumination. To turn back on, touch
anywhere on the display.
H “AV Source” key
To open the source list.
I “BT Phone” key
To enter the Bluetooth Phone mode.
AV Source
BT Phone
12:00
8
9
J Source select keys
To change the source: “Tuner” (Radio),
“Disc,” “AUX” (Auxiliary equipment),
“USB/iPod,” “SensMe™,” “BT Audio”
(Bluetooth Audio).
* Appears only when a source is selected.
Source list:
4
5
6 2
ATT
Top
Tuner
Disc
AUX
USB/iPod
SensMe™
BT Audio
12:00
0
11
Card remote commander RM-X170
8
1
9
2
q;
3
qa
4
5
qs
qd
qf
6
7
• The card remote commander can be generally
used to operate the audio controls simply. For
menu operations, use the touch panel.
• Refer to the pages listed for details.
• Remove the insulation film before use
(page 14).
A OFF button
Press to turn off/stop the source.
Press and hold to shut off completely.
12
qg
qh
E EQ (Equalizer) button
To select an equalizer curve from 7 music
types (“Xplod”/“Vocal”/“Edge”/“Cruise”/
“Space”/“Gravity”/“Custom”/“OFF”).
F Number buttons page 25
Radio:
Press to receive stored stations.
Press and hold to store stations.
Disc/USB:
To locate a title/chapter/track.
B MONITOR OFF button
To turn off the monitor and the button
illumination. To turn back on, press again.
G CLEAR button
To delete an entered number.
C POSITION button
To switch the listening position (“Front L”/
“Front R”/“Front”/“All”/“Custom”/“OFF”).
H ATT (Attenuate) button
To attenuate the sound. To cancel, press
again.
D O (Return) button
To return to the previous display/return to the
menu on a VCD*1.
I u (Play/Pause) button
J .m/M> buttons
Radio:
Press to tune in stations automatically.
Press and hold to find a station manually.
Disc*2/USB:
Press to skip a chapter/track/scene/file.
Press and hold momentarily to reverse/fastforward the video.
Press and hold to reverse/fast-forward track.
Bluetooth Audio*3:
Press to skip a track.
Press and hold to reverse/fast-forward track.
*1 When playing with PBC function.
*2 Operation differs depending on the disc (page 19).
*3 Operation differs depending on the connected
Bluetooth device.
*4 When two auxiliary devices are used.
Note
If the unit is turned off and the display disappears, it
cannot be operated with the card remote commander
unless (SOURCE/OFF) on the main unit is pressed, or
a disc is inserted to activate the unit first.
K DVD playback setting buttons
(AUDIO):
To change the audio language/format.
(For VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC/MPEG-4,
to change the audio channel.)
(SUBTITLE):
To change the subtitle language.
(ANGLE):
To change the viewing angle.
(TOP MENU):
To open the top menu on a DVD.
(MENU):
To open the menu on a disc.
L ZAP button
To enter the ZAPPIN™ mode.
M </M/m/, (Cursor)/ENTER buttons
page 17
To control the menu on a DVD.
N SRC (Source) button
To turn on/change the source: “Tuner”
(Radio), “Disc,” “AUX” (Auxiliary
equipment), “USB/iPod,” “BT Audio”
(Bluetooth Audio).
O MODE button
Press to select the radio band (FM/AM)/
select an auxiliary device (AUX1/AUX2)*4.
P VOL (Volume) +/– buttons
13
Getting Started
Preparing the card remote
commander
Resetting the unit
Before operating the unit for the first time, or
after replacing the car battery or changing the
connections, you must reset the unit.
Press the reset button (page 10) with a pointed
object, such as a ball-point pen.
Note
Pressing the reset button will erase the clock setting
and some stored contents.
Performing initial settings
After resetting, the display for the initial settings
appears.
Initial Setting
Subwoofer
OFF / ON
Listening Position
Front L / Front R
Language
English
OK
1
Touch “Subwoofer” to set the
subwoofer connection status.
Set to “ON” if a subwoofer is connected, or
“OFF” if not.
2
Touch “Listening Position” to set the
listening position.
Set to “Front L” if your listening position is
front left, or “Front R” if front right.
3
Touch “Language” to set the display
language.
Touch repeatedly until the desired language
(English/Spanish/Russian) appears.
4
Touch “OK.”
The setting is complete.
This setting can then be further configured in the
setting menu.
• For details on setting the subwoofer connection
status, see page 52.
• For details on setting the listening position, see
“Optimizing sound for the listening position —
Intelligent Time Alignment” on page 45.
• For details on setting the display language, see
page 50.
14
Before using the card remote commander for the
first time, remove the insulation film.
Basic Operations
Listening to the radio
1
Touch “Source List,” then “Tuner.”
From the top menu, touch “AV Source,” then
“Tuner.”
The radio reception display appears.
Source List
ATT
Top
P1
P2
P3
BTM
P4
P5
P6
Memory
Band
Receive
Menu
Preset
List
PTY
List
15
2
Touch “Band.”
12:00
ATT
Source List
Top
The band list appears.
FM1
FM2
FM3
Band
AM1
Receive
Menu
AM2
Preset
List
PTY
List
15
3
12:00
Touch the desired band (“FM1,” “FM2,” “FM3,” “AM1” or “AM2”).
Touch “Band” to close the band list.
4
Perform tuning.
To tune automatically
Touch ./>.
Scanning stops when the unit receives a station. Repeat this procedure until the desired station
is received.
To tune manually
Touch m/M repeatedly until the desired frequency is received.
To skip frequencies continuously, touch and hold m/M.
continue to next page t
15
Reception controls
Touch the display if the reception controls are not shown.
1
Source List
2
3
ATT
Top
Band
Receive
Menu
Preset
List
15
12:00
4
No. Item
PTY
List
56
7
8
9
Touch to
1
“Source List”
open the source list. (page 11)
2
“ATT”
attenuate the sound. To cancel, touch again.
3
“Top”
open the top menu. (page 11)
4
m/M
tune manually.
Touch and hold to skip frequencies continuously.
5
./>
tune automatically.
6
“Band”
open the band list and change the band.
7
“Receive Menu”
open the receive menu, which contains the following.
• “Mono”: Touch to activate the monaural mode if FM reception
is poor. To restore stereo reception, select “OFF.”
• “Local”: Touch to only tune into stations with stronger signal.
To tune normal stations, select “OFF.”
8
“Preset List”
list up stored stations, or store stations. (page 21)
9
“PTY List”
open the PTY list. (page 22)
Indications during reception
B
A
Source List
ATT
Top
A Current source icon*1
B Band number, Preset number*2, Frequency/status
C Volume level*3
D Setting status (CSO, EQ7, RBE)
*1 Appears only when the controls are shown.
*2 Appears only when the station stored in memory is
received.
*3 When ATT is activated,
appears.
Band
Receive
Menu
15
C
16
Preset
List
PTY
List
12:00
D
Playing discs
Depending on the disc, some operations may be different or restricted.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your disc.
1
Press Z on the main unit.
The front panel opens automatically.
2
Insert the disc (label side up).
The front panel closes automatically, then playback starts.
If the DVD menu appears
Touch the item in the DVD menu directly.
You can also use the menu control panel which can be shown by touching the display in a place other
than menu item area. Touch b/v/V/B to move the cursor, then “Enter” to confirm.
If the menu control panel does not appear by touching the display, use the card remote commander.
About the DVD menu
A DVD is divided into several sections, which make up a picture or music feature. These sections are called “titles.”
When you play a DVD that contains several titles, you can select a desired title using the DVD’s top menu. For
DVDs that allow you to select items such as subtitle/sound language(s), select these items using the DVD menu.
If the disc contains JPEG files
The slide show starts automatically.
To stop playback
Press (SOURCE/OFF) for 1 second.
Note
Discs in DTS format are not supported. The sound is not output if the DTS format is selected.
To eject the disc
1
Press Z on the main unit.
The front panel opens automatically, then the disc is ejected.
2
Press Z on the main unit to close the front panel.
Note
The front panel closes automatically after the caution alarm sounds.
continue to next page t
17
Playback controls
Touch the display if the playback controls are not shown.
Common to all discs/formats
1
Source List
2
3
ATT
Top
DVD
Control
15
4
Source List
Top
Play Menu
SHUF
DVD
Control
12:00
5
ATT
15
Play Menu
SHUF
12:00
7
6
MPEG-4
Source List
ATT
Top
PBC Panel
Source List
ATT
Top
Play Menu
SHUF
List
Play Menu
SHUF
Album
15
12:00
8
9
Source List
15
12:00
9
0
ATT
Top
ZAP
List
Play Menu
SHUF
Album
15
12:00
qa
No. Item
18
Touch to
1
“Source List”
open the source list. (page 11)
2
“ATT”
attenuate the sound. To cancel, touch again.
3
“Top”
open the top menu. (page 11)
0
No. Item
4
./>
Touch to
skip a chapter/track/scene/image/file.
Touch and hold momentarily to reverse/fast-forward the video;
and then repeatedly to switch the speed (× 2 t × 12 t × 120
t × 2…)*1. To cancel, touch u.
Touch and hold to reverse/fast-forward the audio track.
During pause, touch and hold down > to play the video in
slow motion. To cancel, release the key.
5
u
pause/resume play after pause.
6
“Play Menu”
open the play menu, which contains the following.
• “Repeat”/“Shuffle” (page 24)
• “Dolby D Level” (DVD VIDEO playback only) (page 23)
• “Stereo” (VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC playback only)
(page 23)
• “Image Turn” (JPEG playback only): Touch to rotate an
image left/right.
• “Audio” (DivX/MPEG-4 playback only) (page 23)
• “Subtitle” (DivX playback only): Touch repeatedly to turn off/
select the subtitle language.*2*3
7
“DVD Control”
open the DVD control menu, which contains the following.
• “Audio”: Touch repeatedly to select the audio language/
format. (page 23)*2
• “Subtitle”: Touch repeatedly to turn off/select the subtitle
language.*2*3
• “Angle”: Touch repeatedly to change the viewing angle.*2
• “Top Menu”: Touch to open the top menu on the DVD.*2
• “Menu”: Touch to open the menu on the disc.*2
8
“PBC Panel”
show the control panel for the PBC menu. (page 22)
9
“Album” –/+
skip an album (folder) of MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/
MPEG-4.
0
“List”
list up tracks/images/video files. (page 33)
qa
“ZAP”
enter the ZAPPIN mode. (page 33)
*1 The speed depends on the format or the recording method.
*2 Unavailable depending on the disc.
*3 When the 4-digit input prompt appears, input the language code (page 69) for the desired language.
Note
If the disc contains multiple file types, only the selected file type (audio/video/image) can be played. For details on
how to select the file type, see “Selecting a file type” on page 33.
Notes on JPEG playback
• If a large-sized image is rotated, it may take longer to display.
• Progressive JPEG files cannot be displayed.
continue to next page t
19
Indications during playback
Touch the display to show the indications.
For audio discs, some indications are always shown during playback.
MPEG-4
A
Source List
ATT
Top
DVD
Control
Play Menu
SHUF
15
12:00
B
C
D
E
Source List
F
ATT
Top
ZAP
List
Play Menu
SHUF
Album
15
G
20
12:00
A Current source icon
B Volume level*1
C Format, Playback status, Elapsed playback
time*2, Chapter/title/album (folder)/track
number*3*4, Audio Format*5, Setting status
(CSO, EQ7, RBE)
D Playback status, Elapsed playback time*2
E Track name, Album name, Artist name
F Album artwork display*6
G Format, Track number, Album number*7, Setting
status (CSO, EQ7, RBE)
*1 When ATT is activated,
appears.
*2 During JPEG playback or VCD playback with the PBC
function, no indication appears.
*3 Indications differ depending on the disc/format.
*4 When playing a VCD with the PBC function (page 22),
no indication appears.
*5 DVD/DivX only.
*6 The recommended size is from 240 × 240 to 960 × 960
pixels.
*7 MP3/WMA/AAC only.
Advanced Operations — Radio
Storing and receiving stations
Caution
When tuning in stations while driving, use Best
Tuning Memory (BTM) to prevent an accident.
Storing automatically — BTM
1
2
Touch “Source List,” then “Tuner.”
To change the band, touch “Band,” then select
the desired band (“FM1,” “FM2,” “FM3,”
“AM1” or “AM2”).
RDS
Overview
FM stations with Radio Data System (RDS)
service send inaudible digital information along
with the regular radio program signal.
Display items
A
Source List
ATT
Top
Touch “Preset List,” then “BTM.”
The unit stores stations in order of frequency
in the preset list (“P1” to “P6”).
A beep sounds when the setting is stored.
Band
Storing manually
1
While receiving the station that you
want to store, touch “Preset List.”
2
Touch “Memory,” then touch the
number in the list (“P1” to “P6”).
The number and the confirmation display
appear on the display.
3
Touch “Yes.”
The station is stored.
Note
If you try to store another station on the same number,
the previously stored station will be replaced.
Receiving stored stations
1
Select the band, then touch “Preset
List.”
2
Touch the desired number (“P1” to
“P6”).
15
B
Receive
Menu
Preset
List
PTY
List
12:00
C
D
A Band number, Preset number, Frequency
B Stereo*1, RDS*2
C Program service name
D Clock display
*1 During FM reception.
*2 During RDS reception.
RDS services
This unit automatically provides RDS services as
follows:
PTY (Program Types)
Displays the currently received program type.
Also searches your selected program type.
CT (Clock Time)
The CT data from the RDS transmission sets
the clock.
Notes
• Depending on the country/region, not all RDS
functions may be available.
• RDS will not work if the signal strength is too weak,
or if the station you are tuned to is not transmitting
RDS data.
21
Selecting PTY
1
During FM reception, touch “PTY List.”
The PTY list appears if the station is
transmitting PTY data.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
2
Touch the desired program type.
The unit searches for a station broadcasting
the selected program type.
To close the PTY list, touch “PTY List.”
Type of programs
“News” (News), “Current Affairs” (Current
Affairs), “Information” (Information),
“Sport” (Sports), “Education” (Education),
“Drama” (Drama), “Cultures” (Culture),
“Science” (Science), “Varied Speech”
(Varied), “Pop Music” (Pop Music), “Rock
Music” (Rock Music), “Easy Listening”
(M.O.R. Music), “Light Classics M” (Light
classical), “Serious Classics” (Serious
classical), “Other Music” (Other Music),
“Weather & Metr” (Weather), “Finance”
(Finance), “Children’s Progs” (Children’s
program), “Social Affairs” (Social Affairs),
“Religion” (Religion), “Phone In” (Phone
In), “Travel & Touring” (Travel), “Leisure &
Hobby” (Leisure), “Jazz Music” (Jazz
Music), “Country Music” (Country Music),
“National Music” (National Music), “Oldies
Music” (Oldies Music), “Folk Music” (Folk
Music), “Documentary” (Documentary)
Notes
• You cannot use this function in countries/regions
where no PTY data is available.
• You may receive a different radio program from the
one you select.
Setting CT
1
Set “CT” to “ON” in setting (page 50).
Notes
• The CT function may not work even though an RDS
station is being received.
• There might be a difference between the time set by
the CT function and the actual time.
22
Advanced Operations — Discs
Using PBC functions
— Playback control
The PBC menu interactively assists with
operations while a PBC compatible VCD is
played.
1
Start playing a PBC compatible VCD.
The PBC menu appears.
2
Touch “PBC Panel.”
The menu control panel appears.
3
Touch the number keys to select the
desired item, then “Enter.”
4
Follow the instructions in the menu for
interactive operations.
To return to the previous display, press O.
To hide the controls, touch “Close.”
Playing without the PBC function
1
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
2
Touch “Visual.”
The visual setting menu appears.
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “Video CD
PBC” to set to “OFF.”
4
Start playing a VCD.
The PBC menu does not appear during
playback.
Notes
• The items on the menu, and operation procedures
differ depending on the disc.
• During PBC playback, the track number, playback
item, etc., do not appear in the playback display.
• Resume playback is unavailable during playback
without PBC.
Configuring audio settings
Note
Discs in DTS format are not supported. The sound is
not output if the DTS format is selected.
Changing the audio language/
format
For DVD, the audio language can be changed if
the disc is recorded with multilingual tracks. For
DVD/DivX, you can change the audio format
when playing a disc recorded in multiple audio
formats (e.g., Dolby Digital).
Changing the audio channel
MPEG-4
For DVD
When playing VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC/
MPEG-4, you can select the right or left channel
sound to listen through both right and left
speakers.
The options are indicated below.
1
2
“2-Ch”: Standard stereo sound (default)
“L-Ch”: Left channel sound (monaural)
“R-Ch”: Right channel sound (monaural)
During playback, touch “DVD Control.”
Touch “Audio” repeatedly until the
desired audio language/format
appears.
Source List
Audio
For VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC
1
Audio language
ATT
Top
1: English
Dolby D 3/2.1
For MPEG-4
1
Audio
Subtitle
Angle
Top Menu
DVD
Control
Menu
Play Menu
SHUF
15
12:00
Audio format/channel numbers*
The audio language switches among the
available languages.
When the 4-digit input prompt appears, input
the language code (page 69) for the desired
language.
When the same language is displayed two or
more times, the disc is recorded in multiple
audio formats.
* The format name and channel numbers appear as
follows.
Example: Dolby Digital 5.1 ch
Rear component × 2
Dolby D 3 / 2 . 1
Front component × 2 +
Center component × 1
LFE component × 1
To close the DVD control menu, touch “DVD
Control.”
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then “Stereo” repeatedly until the
desired audio channel appears.
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then “Audio” repeatedly until the
desired audio channel appears.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
Note
You may not be able to change the audio setting
depending on the disc.
Tip
The operation by the card remote commander
(pressing (AUDIO) repeatedly) is also available.
Adjusting the audio output level
— Dolby D level
You can adjust the audio output level for a DVD
recorded in Dolby Digital format, to reduce the
volume level differences between disc and
source.
1
2
3
During playback, touch “Play Menu.”
Touch the “Adjust” box to set to “ON.”
Touch –/+ repeatedly to adjust the
output level.
The output level is adjustable in single steps,
between –10 and +10.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
For DivX
1
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then “Audio” repeatedly until the
desired audio format appears.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
23
Locking discs
— Parental control
*
* Excluding DVD-R/DVD-R DL/DVD-RW in VR mode.
You can lock a disc, or set playback restrictions
according to a predetermined level such as
viewer age. Restricted scenes can be blocked or
replaced with different scenes when a parental
control compatible DVD is played.
Changing the area and its movie
rating level
The restriction levels can be set depending on the
area and its movie ratings.
1
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
2
Touch “Visual.”
The visual setting menu appears.
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “DVD
Parental Area.”
When parental control is already activated,
the display to enter your password appears.
To change the setting, enter your password.
The options appear.
4
Touch the desired area to apply its
movie ratings.
When you select “Other,” enter the area code
selecting from “Area code list” on page 69,
using the number keys.
5
Touch “DVD Parental Rating.”
The options appear.
The lower the number, the stricter the
restriction level.
6
Touch the desired rating.
The setting is complete.
Activating parental control
1
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
2
Touch “Visual.”
The visual setting menu appears.
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “DVD
Parental Control.”
The password setting display appears.
4
Touch the number keys to enter your
password, then “OK.”
5
To confirm, touch the number keys to
reenter your password, then “OK.”
The setting is complete.
To delete an entered number, touch “Clear.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Deactivating parental control
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 above.
The parental unlock display appears.
2 Touch the number keys to enter your current
password.
“Parental Unlocked” appears, and the parental
control is deactivated.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Repeat and shuffle play
MPEG-4
1
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then the “Repeat” or “Shuffle” box
repeatedly until the desired option
appears.
Changing the password
Deactivate the parental control, then activate
again using the new password.
Source List
ATT
Top
Chapter
OFF
ON
Repeat
Shuffle
Adjust
Dolby D Level 0
DVD
Control
15
Play Menu
SHUF
12:00
Repeat or shuffle play starts.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
24
The repeat options and switching order of each
disc/format are indicated below.
Disc/format
Options
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Chapter”: Repeats the
current chapter.
“Title”: Repeats the current
title.
*1
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Track”: Repeats the current
track.
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Track”: Repeats the current
track.
“Album”: Repeats the current
album (folder).
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Image”: Repeats the current
image.
“Album”: Repeats the current
album.
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Movie”: Repeats the current
video file.
“Album”: Repeats the current
album (folder).
MPEG-4
The shuffle options and switching order of each
disc/format are indicated below.
Disc/format
*
2
*1
Options
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Title”: Plays chapters in
current title in random order.
*1 Available only when playing version 1.0/1.1 VCD,
or version 2.0 VCD without PBC function.
*2 Excluding DVD-R/DVD-R DL/DVD-RW in VR
mode.
Direct search play
MPEG-4
You can directly locate a desired point by
specifying the title number, chapter number, etc.
1
During playback, press the number
buttons on the card remote
commander to enter an item (track,
title, etc.) number, then press (ENTER).
Playback starts from the beginning of the
selected point.
The search items of disc/format are as follows.
DVD: Title or chapter*1
VCD*2/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC: Track
JPEG: Image
DivX/MPEG-4: File
*1 The search item depends on the setting.
*2 Available only when playing a VCD without PBC
function.
Setting the search item (DVD only)
You can set the search item (title or chapter) for
DVD playback.
1
2
Touch “Source List,” then
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “DVD Direct
Search” to set to “Chapter” or “Title.”
The setting is complete.
.
Touch “Visual.”
The visual setting menu appears.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Disc”: Plays tracks in current
disc in random order.
“OFF”: Returns to normal play
mode.
“Album”: Plays tracks/images/
video files in current album
(folder) in random order.
MPEG-4
25
USB Device Operations
For details on the compatibility of your USB
device, visit the support site.
Support site
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
• MSC (Mass Storage Class) and MTP (Media
Transfer Protocol) type USB devices compliant
with the USB standard can be used.
• Corresponding codec is MP3 (.mp3), WMA
(.wma), AAC (.m4a), JPEG (.jpg), DivX (.avi)
and MPEG-4 (.mp4).
• Backup of data in a USB device is
recommended.
Notes
• Connect the USB device after starting the engine.
Depending on the USB device, malfunction or
damage may occur if it is connected before starting
the engine.
• A large-sized file may take time to start playing back.
Playing a USB device
1
Remove the cap from the USB
connector, and connect the USB
device to the USB connector.
Playback starts automatically.
If a USB device is connected, to start
playback, touch “Source List,” then “USB/
iPod.”
For details on the location of the USB connector,
see the supplied installation/connections manual.
About the controls and indications
during playback
You can control USB playback in the same way
as disc playback. For details, see “Playback
controls” on page 18.
For details on indications during playback, see
“Indications during playback” on page 20.
To stop playback
Press (SOURCE/OFF) for 1 second.
To disconnect the USB device
Stop playback, then disconnect.
Do not disconnect during playback, as data in the
USB device may be damaged.
26
Notes on use
• Do not use USB devices so large or heavy that they
may fall down due to vibration, or cause a loose
connection.
• Do not leave a USB device in a parked car, as
malfunction may result.
• This unit cannot recognize USB devices via a USB
hub.
Notes on playback
• If a USB device contains multiple file types, only the
selected file type (audio/video/image) can be played.
For details on how to select the file type, see
“Selecting a file type” on page 33.
• Displayed indications will differ, depending on the
USB device, recorded format and settings. For
details, visit the support site.
• The maximum number of displayable data is as
follows.
– folders (albums): 256
– files (tracks): 2,000
• It may take time for playback to begin, depending on
the amount of recorded data.
• During playback or fast-forward/reverse of a VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) MP3/WMA/AAC file, elapsed
playing time may not display accurately.
• Playback of a lossless compression file is not
supported.
Repeat and shuffle play
1
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then the “Repeat” or “Shuffle” box
repeatedly until the desired option
appears.
Repeat or shuffle play starts.
The repeat options are as follows.
“OFF”: Returns to normal play mode.
“Track”/“Image”/“Movie”*1: Repeats the
current track/image/video file.
“Album”: Repeats the current album (folder).
“Drive”*2: Repeats the current drive.
The shuffle options are as follows.
“OFF”: Returns to normal play mode.
“Album”: Plays tracks/images/video files in the
current album (folder) in random order.
*1 Options depend on the file type.
*2 When two or more drives are created on the USB
device.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
Enjoying music according to
your mood — SensMe™
Sony’s unique “SensMe™ channels” and
“SensMe™ mood” features automatically group
tracks by channel or mood, and allow you to
enjoy music intuitively.
Before using the SensMe™
function
3 Transferring tracks to the USB device
using “Content Transfer”
In order to group tracks by channel or mood,
track sound patterns need to be analyzed by 12
TONE ANALYSIS, which is loaded in
“Content Transfer.”
With the USB device connected to your
computer, drag and drop tracks from Windows
Explorer or iTunes, etc., to “Content
Transfer.”
Both analysis and transfer of tracks will be
performed by “Content Transfer.”
The following is the basic procedure required to
enjoy the SensMe™ function on the unit.
Content
Transfer
1 Installing “SensMe™ Setup” and
“Content Transfer” in your computer
First install “SensMe™ Setup” and “Content
Transfer” from the supplied CD-ROM.
SensMe™
Setup
Content
Transfer
4 Connecting the USB device and
enjoying the SensMe™ function on the
unit
Connect the set up USB device. You can then
enjoy “SensMe™ channels” or “SensMe™
mood” on this unit.
2 Registering a USB device using
“SensMe™ Setup”
Connect a USB device to your computer, and
perform registration using “SensMe™ Setup”
to enable the SensMe™ function on this unit.
SensMe™
Setup
Tip
Registration can be performed either along with the
installation procedure or after installation.
SensMe™
Installing “SensMe™ Setup” and
“Content Transfer” in your
computer
Use of the supplied software (“SensMe™ Setup”
and “Content Transfer”) is required to enable the
SensMe™ function on this unit.
Install the software in your computer from the
supplied CD-ROM.
1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your
computer.
The Installation Wizard runs automatically.
2
Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation.
27
Registering a USB device using
“SensMe™ Setup”
Playing tracks in the channel
— SensMe™ channels
USB device registration is required to enable the
SensMe™ function on the unit.
“SensMe™ channels” automatically group tracks
into channels by their tunes. You can select and
play a channel that fits your mood, activity, etc.
If registration is not performed along with the
installation procedure, follow the steps below.
1
Start “SensMe™ Setup” on your
computer.
2
Connect a USB device to your
computer.
3
Complete registration following the
on-screen instructions.
1
Connect a USB device set up for the
SensMe™ function.
2
3
Touch “Source List,” then “SensMe™.”
Tip
If you connect a registered USB device containing
analyzed tracks, the USB device can be unregistered
again.
Shuffle All
Energetic
Transferring tracks to the USB
device using “Content Transfer”
To enable the SensMe™ function on this unit,
tracks need to be analyzed and transferred to the
registered USB device, using “Content Transfer.”
1
2
Connect the registered USB device to
your computer.
For “WALKMAN,” connect with the MTP
mode.
For USB devices other than “WALKMAN,”
connect with the MSC mode.
“Content Transfer” starts automatically.
If a message appears, follow the on-screen
instructions to proceed.
Drag and drop tracks from Windows
Explorer or iTunes, etc., to “Content
Transfer.”
The analysis and transfer of tracks start.
For details on operations, see the Help of
“Content Transfer.”
Note
The track analysis by 12 TONE ANALYSIS may take
time, depending on the computer environment.
Tip
Not only audio files but also image or video files can
be transferred using “Content Transfer.” For details,
see the Help of “Content Transfer.”
28
Touch “channels.”
The channel list appears.
Relax
ZAP
15
4
12:00
Touch v/V to scroll the channel list.
Playback of the first track in the current
channel starts from the track’s most melodic
or rhythmical section*.
* May not be detected correctly.
5
Touch the desired channel.
Playback of tracks in the selected channel
starts.
Notes
• Depending on the track, it may not be detected
correctly or may be grouped in a channel not suited
to the track’s mood.
• If the connected USB device contains many tracks, it
may take time for “SensMe™ channels” to start, due
to data reading.
Tip
Tracks are played in random order. The order will vary
at each channel selection.
Channel list
x Recommended, Shuffle All
“Morning” (5:00 AM – 9:59 AM)
“Daytime” (10:00 AM – 3:59 PM)
“Evening” (4:00 PM – 6:59 PM)
“Night” (7:00 PM – 11:59 PM)
“Midnight” (12:00 AM – 4:59 AM)
Tracks recommended for each time of day.
Set the clock (page 57) for the channel to be
displayed accurately.
“Shuffle All”: Plays all analyzed tracks in
random order.
x Basic channels
Plays tracks according to the music type.
“Energetic”: High-spirit tracks.
“Relax”: Calm tracks.
“Mellow”: Mellow, melancholy tracks.
“Upbeat”: Happy tracks to improve your
mood.
“Emotional”: Ballad tracks.
“Lounge”: Lounge music.
“Dance”: Rhythm and rap, rhythm and blues
tracks.
“Extreme”: Intense rock tracks.
Controls and indications during
“SensMe™ channels” playback
A
B
C
D
E
Shuffle All
Energetic
Relax
ZAP
15
12:00
F
G H
A To show the control keys: “Source List,”
“ATT,” “Top.” (page 18)
B To scroll the list and select another channel.
C Indicates the current channel.
D Indicates the album artwork display*1.
E Indicates the elapsed playback time, track
name, artist name.
F To pause/resume play after pause.
G To skip a track.
H To enter the ZAPPIN mode. (page 33)
During ZAPPIN playback of “SensMe™
channels,” the most melodic or rhythmical
sections*2 of the tracks are played.
*1 The recommended size is from 240 × 240 to 960 ×
960 pixels.
*2 May not be detected correctly.
x In-car channels
Plays tracks that are suitable while driving.
“Freeway”: Speedy, high-spirit tracks.
“Chillout Drive”: Intoned, healing ballad
tracks.
“Weekend Trip”: Delightful, bright and happy
tracks.
“Midnight Cruise”: Jazz or piano-featured
tracks with mature mood.
“Party Ride”: Up-tempo and alive tracks.
“Morning Commute”: Bright and breezy
tracks.
“Goin’ Home”: Warm and relaxing tracks.
29
Playing tracks in the mood map
— SensMe™ mood
“SensMe™ mood” distributes tracks as dots on a
two-axis mood map, based on the characteristics
of the individual tracks.
Controls and indications during
“SensMe™ mood” playback
A
B
C
D
E
Fast
By touching the point on the map according to
your mood, a circle appears around the touched
point, and the tracks inside the circle are played.
Mood
1
Connect a USB device set up for the
SensMe™ function.
Style
2
3
Touch “Source List,” then “SensMe™.”
Touch “mood.”
The two-axis mood map appears.
Time
ZAP
Fast
Type
Happy
Sad
Style
Time
ZAP
Slow
15
15
F
Mood
12:00
Dots representing tracks
Touch the desired point on the map.
A circle appears around the touched point,
and playback of tracks inside the circle starts.
Playback of the first track starts from its most
melodic or rhythmical section*.
* May not be detected correctly.
30
Happy
Sad
Slow
Circle
4
Type
12:00
G
HI
A To show the control keys: “Source List,”
“ATT,” “Top.” (page 18)
B To move the circle and regroup tracks.
C To change the size of the circle: small,
medium or large.
D Indicates the album artwork display*1.
E Indicates the elapsed playback time, track
name, artist name.
F To change parameters on the horizontal axis.
G To skip a track.
H To pause/resume play after pause.
I To enter the ZAPPIN mode. (page 33)
During ZAPPIN playback of “SensMe™
mood,” the most melodic or rhythmical
sections*2 of the tracks are played.
*1 The recommended size is from 240 × 240 to 960 ×
960 pixels.
*2 May not be detected correctly.
Changing parameters on the
horizontal axis
Notes
• Only the last 200 most recently transferred tracks
using “Content Transfer” are mapped.
• Depending on the track, it may not be detected
correctly or may be mapped in the position not
suited to the track’s mood.
• If the connected USB device contains many tracks, it
may take time for “SensMe™ mood” to start, due to
data reading.
In the mood map, you can change parameters on
the horizontal axis. Tracks are remapped
according to the characteristics of the
parameters.
“Mood”
“Sad” – “Happy”
Tips
• In the mood map, the currently played track is
indicated as a green dot.
• Tracks are played from the circle’s center outward.
“Type”
“Acoustic” – “Electronic”
“Style”
“Soft” – “Hard”
“Time”
“Morning” – “Midnight”
Touch
To change parameters to
iPod Operations
For details on the compatibility of your iPod, see
“About iPod” on page 61 or visit the support site.
Press (SOURCE/OFF) for 1 second.
To disconnect the iPod
Support site
Stop playback, then disconnect.
Do not disconnect during playback, as data in the
iPod may be damaged.
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
About the resuming mode
In this manual, “iPod” is used as a general
reference for the iPod functions on the iPod and
iPhone, unless otherwise specified by the text or
illustrations.
Playing an iPod
1
2
To stop playback
Reduce the volume on this unit.
Remove the cap from the USB
connector, and connect the iPod to the
USB connector.
Use of the optional USB connection cable
RC-200IPV is recommended.*1
For details, see the supplied installation/
connections manual.
The following display appears on the iPod
screen*2, then playback starts from the item
last played.
If an iPod is already connected, to start
playback, touch “Source List,” then “USB/
iPod.”
When the iPod currently playing is connected to
the dock connector, the mode of this unit changes
to resuming mode and playback starts in the
mode set by the iPod.
In the resuming mode, repeat/shuffle setting is
not available.
Caution for iPhone
When you connect an iPhone via USB, telephone
volume is controlled by iPhone itself. In order to avoid
sudden loud sound after a call, do not increase the
volume on the unit during a telephone call.
Note
This unit cannot recognize iPod via a USB hub.
Tips
• When the ignition key is turned to the ACC position
with the unit on, the iPod will be recharged.
• If the iPod is disconnected during playback, “USB
device is not connected.” appears in the display of
the unit.
Setting the play mode
You can set one of the following play modes.
For audio playback
“Album,” “Track,” “Genre,” “Playlist,”
“Artist,” “Podcast”*
*1 To play videos of iPod with video, use of the
RC-200IPV is required.
*2 May not appear in the case of an iPod touch or
iPhone being connected, or when the iPod was
last played back using passenger control.
3
Adjust the volume on this unit.
About the controls and indications
during playback
You can control iPod playback in the same way
as disc playback. For details, see “Playback
controls” on page 18.
For details on indications during playback, see
“Indications during playback” on page 20.
For video playback
“Movie,” “Rental,” “TV Show,” “Music
Video,” “Playlist,” “Podcast”*
* May not appear depending on iPod setting.
1
2
3
During playback, touch “List.”
Touch “MUSIC” or “VIDEO.”
Touch the desired play mode.
To start playback, touch the desired item(s) in
the list.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
To skip items of the selected play
mode
During playback, touch –/+ of the selected play
mode.
31
Repeat and shuffle play
1
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then the “Repeat” or “Shuffle” box
repeatedly until the desired option
appears.
Repeat or shuffle play starts.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
The repeat options are as follows.
For audio playback
“OFF”: Returns to normal play mode.
“Track”: Repeats the current track.
“Album”/“Podcast”/“Artist”/“Playlist”/
“Genre”*: Repeats the current item of the
selected play mode.
For video playback
“OFF”: Returns to normal play mode.
“Track”: Repeats the current video.
“Rental”/“TV Show”/“Music Video”/
“Playlist”/“Podcast”*: Repeats the current
item of the selected play mode.
The shuffle options are as follows.
For audio playback
“OFF”: Returns to normal play mode.
“Album”/“Podcast”/“Artist”/“Playlist”/
“Genre”*: Plays tracks of the selected play
mode in random order.
“Device”: Plays all tracks in an iPod in random
order.
* Differs depending on the selected play mode.
Note
Displayed options may not conform to actual
operation.
32
Operating an iPod directly
— Passenger control
You can directly operate an iPod connected to
this unit.
1
During playback, touch “Play Menu,”
then the “Passenger Control” box to
set to “ON.”
Deactivating the passenger control
Touch the “Passenger Control” box to set to
“OFF.”
The play mode changes to resuming mode.
To close the play menu, touch “Play Menu.”
Notes
• To output video to this unit, you need to activate the
video output of iPod.
• The volume can be adjusted only by this unit.
• The repeat setting will be off if the passenger control
mode is canceled.
3
Useful Functions
Listing up tracks/images/video
files — List
Touch the desired file.
Playback of the selected file starts.
Searching a track by listening
to track passages — ZAPPIN™
Selecting a track/image/video file
MPEG-4
You can list up albums/folders/tracks/images/
video files, and select a desired one to play.
This function is convenient especially for the
disc in MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4
format or USB device containing many albums/
tracks, etc.
1
While playing back short track passages in a disc
or USB device in sequence, you can search for a
track you want to listen to.
This function is convenient, for example, when
searching for a track in shuffle or shuffle repeat
mode.
1
During playback, touch “List.”
The list of categories or files in the currently
played item appears.
During audio playback, touch “ZAP.”
Playback starts from a passage of the next
track.
The passage is played for the set time, and a
beep sounds before the next passage starts.
Contents List
File 01
File 02
1/5
File 03
File 04
2
File 05
File 06
15
12:00
Page position bar
To move to the upper level, touch
.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
To jump pages, touch the page position bar.
2
Touch the desired item.
Playback starts.
Selecting a file type
MPEG-4
If the disc/USB device contains multiple file
types, only the selected file type (audio/video/
image) can be played. The playback priority
order of file type is initially set to audio, video,
then image (e.g., if the disc contains video files
and image files, only video files are played). You
can select the file type to list up, then select the
desired file to play.
1
2
“ZAP”
touched.
The playback section of each
track in ZAPPIN mode.
Touch “ZAP” when a track you want to
listen to is played back.
The track that you select returns to normal
play mode from the beginning.
To search a track by ZAPPIN mode again,
repeat steps 1 and 2.
In the case of “SensMe™ channels”
or “SensMe™ mood” playback
If you enter the ZAPPIN mode during
“SensMe™ channels” or “SensMe™ mood”
playback, the most melodic or rhythmical
sections* of tracks are played. For details on the
SensMe™ function, see “Enjoying music
according to your mood — SensMe™” on
page 27.
* May not be detected correctly.
Tips
• You can change the playback time (page 55), but
cannot select the track passage to play back.
• You can deactivate the beep sound between track
passages (page 55).
During playback, touch “List.”
Touch
, then “Audio,” “Image” or
“Video” to select the file type.
To close the option menu, touch “Close.”
33
Using Gesture Command
You can perform frequently-used operations by
drawing the following command stroke in the
reception/playback display.
Draw
To
Radio reception:
seek forward stations.
(The same as >.)
a horizontal
line
DVD/VCD playback:
(left to right) skip forward a chapter/track.
(The same as >.)
JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4/audio
playback:
skip forward a file/track.
(The same as >.)
Handsfree Calling and Audio
Streaming — Bluetooth
Before using the Bluetooth
function
Basic procedure of the Bluetooth
function
1 Pairing
When connecting Bluetooth devices for the
first time, mutual registration is required. This
is called “pairing.” This registration (pairing)
is required only for the first time, as this unit
and the other devices will recognize each
other automatically from the next time.
Radio reception:
seek backward stations.
(The same as ..)
a horizontal
line
(right to left) DVD/VCD playback:
skip backward a chapter/track.
(The same as ..)
JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4/audio
playback:
skip backward a file/track.
(The same as ..)
Note
If you delete the device registration from this unit,
you need to perform pairing again.
2 Connection
After pairing is made, connect this unit and
the Bluetooth device. Depending on the
device, connection is automatically made
along with the pairing.
Radio reception:
receive stored stations (go
forward).
a vertical line DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG-4
(upwards)
playback:
fast-forward the video.
JPEG/audio playback:
skip forward an album (folder).
(The same as “Album” +.)
Radio reception:
receive stored stations (go
backward).
a vertical line DVD/VCD/DivX/MPEG-4
(downwards) playback:
reverse the video.
JPEG/audio playback:
skip backward an album
(folder).
(The same as “Album” –.)
To view the instructions on Gesture
Command
34
Touch
when it is shown in the top right
corner of the display.
3 Handsfree calling/Audio streaming
You can make/receive a handsfree call, or
listen to audio through this unit.
For details on compatibility of your device, visit
the support site.
Support site
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
Installing the external microphone
XA-MC10
To capture your voice during handsfree calling,
you need to install the external microphone XAMC10 (supplied).
For details on how to connect the microphone,
see the supplied installation/connections manual.
Bluetooth status indication
Pairing
Pairing is required only the first time you connect
to a Bluetooth device (cellular phone, etc.).*1
Bluetooth signal indicator: Lights up
when the Bluetooth signal is on.
To pair this unit to a Bluetooth device, you need
to enter the same passkey*2 on this unit and on
the Bluetooth device. The passkey can be either
your own selected number or the number
determined by the Bluetooth device. For details,
see the manual of the Bluetooth device.
*1 If you delete the device registration from this unit,
you need to perform pairing again.
*2 Passkey may be called “passcode,” “PIN code,”
“PIN number,” “password,” etc., depending on the
Bluetooth device.
ATT
Calling...
Name
0123456789
Tip
You can pair up to 9 devices.
Calling...
15
12:00
Bluetooth status indications
None: No device is connected for
audio streaming purpose.
Flashing: Connection is in progress.
Lit: Connected to a device.
None: No cellular phone is connected
for handsfree calling purpose.
Flashing: Connection is in progress.
Lit: Connected to a cellular phone.
Signal strength status of connected
cellular phone.
Remaining battery status of connected
cellular phone.
Searching from this unit
Check that the other Bluetooth device is set to
allow for searching (discoverable) beforehand.
1
Select the Bluetooth source.
To select Bluetooth Phone, press (TOP), then
touch “BT Phone” in the top menu.
To select Bluetooth Audio, touch “Source
List,” then “BT Audio.”
2
Touch “BT Menu.”
In the case of Bluetooth Audio, touch “Play
Menu,” then “BT Menu.”
The Bluetooth setting menu appears.
Back
ATT
Top
BT Menu
Signal
OFF / ON
Discoverable
Hide / Show
Device Name
1/2
Search
Device List
15
12:00
continue to next page t
35
3
Touch “Search.”
Search of connectable Bluetooth devices
starts.*1*2
After search is complete, the list of detected
devices*3 appears.
5
*1 If the Bluetooth signal of this unit is off, it
activates automatically when searching starts.
*2 Search time varies depending on the number of
connectable devices.
*3 The name or address (if name is unavailable) of
detected devices are displayed.
4
5
6
Start searching for this unit from the
other Bluetooth device.
After search is complete, this unit appears as
“Sony Automotive”* in the list of the other
Bluetooth device.
* Can be changed in the Bluetooth setting
(page 44).
DR-BT30Q
Sony
Automotive
XXXXXXX
Touch the device to connect.
Select the connection type.
Touch “Handsfree Connect” to use for
handsfree calling.
Touch “Audio Connect” to use for audio
streaming.
Pairing start and the passkey input display
appears.
Touch the number keys to enter the
passkey, then “OK.”
Perform the required operation also on the
other Bluetooth device.
Pairing is complete and this unit is connected
to the other Bluetooth device.
When connection is made successfully, or
appears at the bottom of the display.
Searching from the Bluetooth
device
The procedure to search for this unit from the
other Bluetooth device is explained below.
1
Select the Bluetooth source.
To select Bluetooth Phone, press (TOP), then
touch “BT Phone” in the top menu.
To select Bluetooth Audio, touch “Source
List,” then “BT Audio.”
2
Touch “BT Menu.”
In the case of Bluetooth Audio, touch “Play
Menu,” then “BT Menu.”
The Bluetooth setting menu appears.
3
Touch “Signal,” then “Yes” to set
“Signal” to “ON.”
The Bluetooth signal of this unit is activated.
4
Touch “Discoverable” to set to
“Show.”
The unit is ready to be detected by the other
Bluetooth device.
After you perform the required operation on
the other Bluetooth device, the passkey input
display appears on this unit.
6
Touch the number keys to enter the
passkey, then “OK.”
Pairing is complete and this unit is connected
to the other Bluetooth device.
When connection is made successfully, or
appears at the bottom of the display.
Notes
• While connecting to a Bluetooth device, this unit
cannot be detected from another device. To enable
detection, disconnect the current connection and
search for this unit from another device.
• Depending on the device, searching from this unit
may not be possible. In this case, search for this unit
from the other device.
• If you search for this unit and the other device
mutually at the same time, this unit will not recognize
the other device.
• It may take time to search or connect.
• Depending on the device, the connection
confirmation display appears before inputting the
passkey.
• The time limit for inputting the passkey differs
depending on the device.
• This unit cannot be connected to a device that
supports only HSP (Head Set Profile).
Connecting
When the ignition is switched to on with the
Bluetooth signal activated, this unit searches for
the last-connected Bluetooth device, and
connection is made automatically if possible.
This chapter explains how to connect manually
to registered Bluetooth devices.
Before starting, be sure to activate the Bluetooth
signal both on this unit (page 44) and the other
Bluetooth device.
36
1
Select the Bluetooth source.
To select Bluetooth Phone, press (TOP), then
touch “BT Phone” in the top menu.
To select Bluetooth Audio, touch “Source
List,” then “BT Audio.”
To connect to the last-connected
device from this unit (Bluetooth
Audio only)
2
Touch “BT Menu.”
In the case of Bluetooth Audio, touch “Play
Menu,” then “BT Menu.”
The Bluetooth setting menu appears.
Note
If connection is made during audio streaming, noise
may occur over playback sound.
3
Touch “Device List.”
The list of registered Bluetooth devices
appears.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
4
5
Touch the device to connect.
Select the connection type.
Touch “Handsfree Connect” to use for
handsfree calling.
Touch “Audio Connect” to use for audio
streaming.
Connection is complete.
When connection is made successfully, or
appears at the bottom of the display.
In the device list, the currently connected
device is indicated by the icon at the head of
its name.
Touch “Source List,” “BT Audio,” then
“Connect.”
Tip
You can connect a cellular phone for audio streaming
purpose if it supports A2DP (Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile).
Handsfree calling
Once the unit is connected to the cellular phone,
you can make/receive handsfree calls by
operating this unit.
Making calls
By dialing a phone number
1
To connect from the other Bluetooth
device
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
Back
Operate the other Bluetooth device to connect to
this unit.
When connection is made successfully, or
appears at the bottom of the display.
ATT
BT Menu
Top
Preset Dial
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Voice Dial
To disconnect
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 above.
2 Touch the currently connected device, then
“Handsfree Disconnect” or “Audio
Disconnect.”
BT phone
Call Menu
PB Access
15
2
12:00
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Dial.”
The number input display appears.
To delete all registrations
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 above.
2 Touch “Delete All,” then “Yes” in the
confirmation display.
To delete an individual registration
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 above.
2 Touch the device to delete, then “Delete this
device from List.”
3 Touch “Yes” in the confirmation display.
Back
ATT
Top
Dial
Please input phone number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
15
12:00
continue to next page t
37
3
Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number, then
.
To delete an entered number, touch
.
The call is made and the calling display
appears until the other party answers.
By the preset dial
You can store up to 6 contacts in the preset dial.
For details on how to store, see “Preset dial” on
page 42.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch the number in the list (“P1” to
“P6”).
The contact confirmation display appears.
3
Touch “Yes.”
The call is made and the calling display
appears until the other party answers.
ATT
Calling...
Name
0123456789
Calling...
15
12:00
By the voice dial function
By the phonebook
For details on how to manage the phonebook
data, see “Phonebook management” on page 40.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Phonebook.”
The phonebook appears.
3
Select the desired contact.
1 In the initial list, touch the initial of the
contact.
2 In the name list, touch the name of the
contact.
3 In the number list, touch the phone
number.
The contact confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Call.”
The call is made and the calling display
appears until the other party answers.
Tip
You can also browse the phonebook of the connected
cellular phone on this unit and make a call (page 41).
By the call history
The unit stores the last 20 calls, allowing you to
select one quickly from the list.
38
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Recent Call.”
The list of call history appears.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
3
Touch the desired item in the list.
The contact confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Call.”
The call is made and the calling display
appears until the other party answers.
You can make a call using the voice tag stored on
the connected cellular phone.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
3
Touch “Voice Dial.”
Say the voice tag stored on the cellular
phone.
Your voice is recognized, then the call is
made.
The calling display appears until the other
party answers.
Notes
• Say the voice tag in the same way as you stored it
on the cellular phone.
• If the voice dial function is activated on the
connected cellular phone, it may not work by this
unit.
• Do not use the voice dial function on the cellular
phone while it is connected to this unit.
• Noises such as the engine running may interfere
with sound recognition. In order to improve
recognition, operate under conditions where noise is
minimized.
• Voice dial may not work depending on the
recognition specification of the cellular phone. For
details, visit the support site.
To adjust the talker’s voice volume
Press (VOL) +/– while making a call.
The level of talker’s voice volume will be stored
into memory, independently from the regular
volume level.
Receiving calls
Operations during a call
With the unit connected to the cellular phone,
you can receive a call in any status.
The following display indicates an incoming call,
along with the ring tone.
The following display appears during a call.
ATT
BT Menu
Top
On the Line.
Name
ATT
0123456789
Incoming call...
Handsfree OFF
Open Keypad
Name
0123456789
10:59
15
12:00
Incoming call...
15
12:00
To answer the call
Touch
.
To adjust the ring tone volume
Press (VOL) +/– while receiving a call.
The level of ring tone volume will be stored into
memory, independently from the regular volume
level.
To reject a call
Touch
.
Note
The ring tone and talker’s voice are output only from
front speakers.
Tips
• You can set to answer a call automatically (page 44).
• You can set to use the ring tone of the cellular phone
or this unit (page 44).
To adjust the talker’s voice volume
Press (VOL) +/– during a call.
The level of talker’s voice volume will be stored
into memory, independently from the regular
volume level.
To send DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple
Frequency) tones
Touch “Open Keypad,” then the required number
keys.
To transfer the current call to the
cellular phone
Touch “Handsfree OFF.”
To transfer back to the handsfree call, touch
“Handsfree ON.”
Note
Depending on the cellular phone, connection may be
cut off when call transfer is attempted.
To adjust the volume for the other
party
1
2
3
Touch “BT Menu.”
4
Touch “Back” repeatedly to return to
the previous displays.
Touch v/V to scroll, then “MIC Gain.”
Touch –/+ to adjust the level.
The level is adjustable in single steps,
between –2 and +2.
To end a call
Touch
.
39
Phonebook management
To add a contact by entering the
name and number
You can store up to 300 contacts in the
phonebook and up to 5 phone numbers can be
registered to each contact.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
Notes
• Downloaded phonebook data from a cellular phone
cannot be overwritten by subsequent data. However,
some data (name, etc.,) may be duplicated as a
result.
• Phonebook data may be lost if this unit is damaged.
• When disposing of this unit, delete the phonebook
data by initializing (page 44).
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Phonebook.”
The phonebook appears.
3
Touch “Add Contact.”
The contact registration display appears.
Back
Top
ATT
Add Contact
Empty
Storing phonebook data
Empty
1/1
To download from a cellular phone
If the connected cellular phone supports PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile), you can download
phonebook data and store on this unit.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “PB Access.”
The phonebook access menu appears.
3
Touch “Access” to select the memory
where phonebook data is stored.
To download the data in a cellular phone’s
internal memory, set to “Memory.”
To download the data on SIM, set to “SIM.”
4
Touch “Phonebook Download.”
When downloading is complete, “Complete”
appears and the phonebook data is stored on
this unit.
To receive from a cellular phone
You can send phonebook data from the
connected cellular phone and receive it on this
unit.
40
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Receive
Phonebook.”
This unit is ready for receiving phonebook
data.
3
Send the phonebook data by
operating the connected cellular
phone.
When receiving is complete, “Complete”
appears and the phonebook data is stored on
this unit.
Add to Phonebook?
15
12:00
4
Touch “Empty” on the first line.
The name input display appears.
5
Touch the character keys to enter the
name, then “OK.”
For details on how to use the keyboard, see
“About the keyboard to edit the name” on
page 42.
The contact registration display reappears.
6
Touch “Empty.”
The number input display appears.
7
Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number, then “OK.”
The phone number type selection display
appears.
8
Touch the desired phone number type.
The contact registration display reappears.
To enter other phone numbers, repeat steps 6
to 8.
9
Touch “Add to Phonebook?”
The contact is added to the phonebook.
To add a contact from the call history
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Recent Call.”
The list of call history appears.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
3
Touch the item to add to the
phonebook.
The contact confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Save to Phonebook.”
The name input display appears.
5
Touch the character keys to enter the
name, then “OK.”
For details on how to use the keyboard, see
“About the keyboard to edit the name” on
page 42.
The contact is added to the phonebook.
Browsing a phonebook in a cellular
phone
If the connected cellular phone supports PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile), you can browse its
phonebook data on this unit.
You can also make a call to a contact or add the
contact to this unit’s phonebook.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “PB Access.”
The phonebook access menu appears.
3
Touch “Access” to select the memory
where phonebook data is stored.
To browse the data in a cellular phone’s
internal memory, set to “Memory.”
To browse the data on SIM, set to “SIM.”
4
Touch “Phonebook Browsing.”
The phonebook of the connected cellular
phone appears.
5
Select the desired contact.
1 In the initial list, touch the initial of the
contact.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Phonebook.”
The phonebook appears.
3
Touch “Delete All.”
The confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Yes.”
All phonebook data is deleted.
To delete an individual contact from
the phonebook
1
2
Select the contact to delete.
1 In the initial list, touch the initial of the
contact.
2 In the name list, touch the name of the
contact.
3
Touch “Delete Contact.”
The confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Yes.”
The contact is deleted from the phonebook.
Editing a contact
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Phonebook.”
The phonebook appears.
3
Select the contact to edit.
1 In the initial list, touch the initial of the
contact.
2 In the name list, touch the name of the
contact.
3 In the number list, touch the phone
number.
The contact confirmation display appears.
Follow steps 1 to 2 above.
2 In the name list, touch the name of the
contact.
4
Touch the desired edit option.
Touch
To call the contact
Touch the phone number to call, then “Yes” in
the confirmation display.
To add the contact to this unit’s
phonebook
“Edit Name”
edit the name of the
contact. Enter the new
name, then touch
“OK.”
“Add Number”
add the phone number
to the contact. Enter the
phone number, then
touch “OK.”
the phone
number in the
list
delete the selected
phone number. Touch
“Delete Number,” then
“Yes.”
Touch “Save to Phonebook,” then “Yes” in the
confirmation display.
Deleting phonebook data
To delete all phonebook data on this
unit
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
To
continue to next page t
41
About the keyboard to edit the name
Back
ATT
4
Touch “Yes.”
The selected item is deleted from the call
history.
Top
Contact Name
Please Input Name
Preset dial
NAME
Q
W
A
Z
abc
E
S
R
D
X
T
F
C
123
Y
G
V
U
H
B
I
J
N
O
K
M
Space
To store from the phonebook
OK
15
Touch
You can store contacts in the phonebook or call
history into the preset dials.
P
L
12:00
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Phonebook.”
The phonebook appears.
3
Select the contact to store in the
preset dial.
To
“ABC” or “abc”
change the case.
the desired
character key
enter the character.
“123”
switch to the numeric
keyboard.
1 In the initial list, touch the initial of the
contact.
the desired
enter the number/
number/symbol key symbol.
2 In the name list, touch the name of the
contact.
“Space”
3 In the number list, touch the phone
number.
The contact confirmation display appears.
enter a space.
delete a character.
“OK”
complete the name edit.
4
Call data management
Call history
To store from the call history
You can delete the items in the call history.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Recent Call.”
The list of call history appears.
To scroll the list, touch v/V.
3
Touch the desired item in the list.
The contact confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Preset Memory,” then the
desired preset number (“P1” to “P6”).
The contact is stored in the selected preset
number.
To delete all items in the call history
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “Recent Call.”
The list of call history appears.
3
Touch “Delete All.”
The confirmation display appears.
4
Touch “Yes.”
All items in the call history are deleted.
To delete an individual item in the
call history
42
Touch “Preset Memory,” then the
desired preset number (“P1” to “P6”).
The contact is stored in the selected preset
number.
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 2 above.
3
Touch “Delete Number.”
The confirmation display appears.
In the list, touch the item to delete.
The contact confirmation display appears.
To change the registration of the
preset dial
Follow the procedure above and overwrite a
registered preset dial.
Locking the personal information
To prevent unauthorized access to personal
information, you can lock call data by setting a 4digit code.
Once locked, you need to enter the code to access
the items in the call menu.
1
Press (TOP), then touch “BT Phone”
in the top menu.
The Bluetooth Phone display appears.
2
Touch “Call Menu,” then “PIM
Security.”
The confirmation display appears.
3
Touch “Yes.”
The code setting display appears.
4
Touch the number keys to enter your
code, then “OK.”
5
To confirm, touch the number keys to
reenter your code, then “OK.”
The setting is complete.
To delete an entered number, touch “Clear.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Unlocking the call data
1 Follow steps 1 to 2 above.
The confirmation display appears.
2 Touch “Yes.”
The unlock display appears.
3 Touch the number keys to enter your code.
“Complete” appears, and the call data is
unlocked.
Operating the Bluetooth device
with this unit
If the other device supports AVRCP (Audio
Video Remote Control Profile) of Bluetooth
technology, you can control the playback on this
unit.
Operations can be performed in the same way as
disc playback (page 18), except for the
following.
Touch
To
“Play Menu” c
“BT Menu”
open the Bluetooth setting
menu (page 43).
–/+ in the
“Level” box
reduce the volume level
differences between this
unit and the other Bluetooth
device. The level is
adjustable in single steps,
between –8 and +18.
“Connect”
connect to the lastconnected device from this
unit.
Notes
• The available operation differs depending on the
Bluetooth device. Perform unavailable operations on
the Bluetooth device.
• Depending on the Bluetooth device, it may be
necessary to touch u twice to start/pause the
playback.
• During audio streaming, some indications such as
track name, etc., may not appear on this unit.
Bluetooth settings
Audio streaming
Listening to a Bluetooth device
through this unit
If the other device supports A2DP (Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile) of Bluetooth
technology, you can listen to the playback sound
through this unit.
1
Connect this unit and the Bluetooth
device (page 36).
2
3
Reduce the volume on this unit.
4
Operate the other Bluetooth device to
start playback.
5
Adjust the volume on this unit.
Touch “Source List,” then “BT Audio.”
The Bluetooth Audio display appears.
The Bluetooth settings can be configured in “BT
Menu.”
1
Select the Bluetooth source.
To select Bluetooth Phone, press (TOP), then
touch “BT Phone” in the top menu.
To select Bluetooth Audio, touch “Source
List,” then “BT Audio.”
2
Touch “BT Menu.”
In the case of Bluetooth Audio, touch “Play
Menu,” then “BT Menu.”
The Bluetooth setting menu appears.
3
Touch the desired item in the list and
configure the setting.
continue to next page t
43
The items in the Bluetooth setting menu are as
follows.
Sound Adjustment
“Signal”*1
Activates the Bluetooth signal: “ON,” “OFF.”
Selecting the sound quality
— EQ7
“Discoverable”*1 (page 36)
Allows the other Bluetooth device to search for
this unit: “Show,” “Hide.”
“Device Name”*1
Changes the name of this unit displayed on the
connected device. (Default setting: “Sony
Automotive”)
For details on basic operation of keyboard, see
“About the keyboard to edit the name” on
page 42.
You can select an equalizer curve from 7 music
types (“Xplod,” “Vocal,” “Edge,” “Cruise,”
“Space,” “Gravity,” “Custom” or “OFF”).
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
“Search”*1 (page 35)
Searches for connectable Bluetooth devices.
Touch “EQ7.”
The options appear.
4
“Device List”*1 (page 36)
Shows the list of registered devices; connects to
a registered device; deletes all registrations.
Touch the desired equalizer curve.
The setting is complete.
To cancel the equalizer curve, select “OFF.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
“Auto Answer”*1
Answers an incoming call automatically.
– “Short”: to answer automatically after 3
seconds.
– “Long”: to answer automatically after 10
seconds.
– “OFF”: to not answer automatically.
“Ringtone”*1*2
Uses the ring tone of this unit or the connected
cellular phone: “Default,” “Cellular.”
“EC/NC Mode” (Echo Canceller/Noise
Canceller Mode)
Reduces echo and noise in phone call
conversations.
Set to “Mode 1” normally.
If the outgoing sound quality is unsatisfactory,
set to “Mode 2” or “OFF.”
Customizing the equalizer curve
— EQ7 Tune
“Custom” of EQ7 allows you to make your own
equalizer settings. You can adjust the level of 7
different bands: 62 Hz, 157 Hz, 396 Hz, 1 kHz,
2.5 kHz, 6.3 kHz, and 16 kHz.
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
3
Touch “Sound,” then “EQ7.”
Touch “Custom,” then “Tune.”
The tuning display appears.
Back
ATT
Top
EQ7 Tune : Custom
“MIC Gain” (page 39)
Adjust the volume for the other party: –2 ~ +2.
“Initialize”*1
Initializes all Bluetooth-related settings. Touch
“Yes” in the confirmation display.
0
62 Hz
0
157 Hz
0
396 Hz
0
1 kHz
0
2.5 kHz
Reset
15
*1 Cannot be configured during a handsfree call.
*2 Depending on the cellular phone, this unit’s ring
tone may be output even if set to “Cellular.”
0
6.3 kHz
0
16 kHz
OK
12:00
4
Touch +/– of each frequency to adjust
their levels.
The level is adjustable in single steps,
between –8 and +8.
To restore the factory-set equalizer curve,
touch “Reset.”
5
Touch “OK.”
The setting is complete.
Note
For details on the setting of other Bluetooth devices,
see their respective manuals.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
44
Tip
Other equalizer types are also adjustable.
Optimizing sound for the
listening position
— Intelligent Time Alignment
Adjusting the sound
characteristics
The sound balance between left and right
speakers (“Balance”) and front and rear speakers
(“Fader”) can be adjusted to your preference.
You can also adjust the volume level of
subwoofer if it is connected.
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
Touch “Balance/Fader.”
The setting display appears.
Back
ATT
Top
Balance/Fader/Subwoofer Level Adjust
Fader : 0
Subwoofer : 0
Balance : 0
15
4
5
12:00
Touch B/V/v/b to adjust the balance/
fader.
The level is adjustable in single steps between
–15 and +15 (Balance)/–15 and +15 (Fader).
Touch +/– to adjust the volume level of
subwoofer.
This setting is adjustable only when
subwoofer is connected and “Subwoofer” is
set to “ON” (page 52).
The level is adjustable in single steps,
between –6 and +6.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
The unit can change the localization of sound by
delaying the sound output from each speaker to
suit your position, and simulate a natural sound
field with the feeling of being in the center of it
wherever you sit in the car.
The options for “Listening Position” are
indicated below.
“Front L” (1): Front left
“Front R” (2): Front right
“Front” (3): Center front
“All” (4): In the center of
your car
“Custom”: Precisely
calibrated position (page 46)
“OFF”: No position set
132
4
You can also set the approximate subwoofer
position from your listening position if:
– the subwoofer is connected and “Subwoofer” is
set to “ON” (page 52).
– the listening position is set to “Front L,” “Front
R,” “Front” or “All.”
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
Touch “Listening Position.”
The setting display appears.
4
Set the listening position.
Touch “Front L,” “Front R,” “Front,” “All” or
“Custom.”
5
Set the subwoofer position.
If you select “Front L,” “Front R,” “Front” or
“All” in step 4 above, you can set the
subwoofer position.
Touch “Near,” “Normal” or “Far.”
The setting is complete.
To cancel Intelligent Time Alignment, select
“OFF.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
45
Precisely calibrating the listening
position
— Intelligent Time Alignment Tune
Speaker configuration and
volume setup
You can precisely calibrate your listening
position from each speaker so that the sound
delay reaches the listener more correctly.
Creating a virtual center speaker
— CSO
Before starting, measure the distance between
your listening position and each speaker.
To fully enjoy surround sound, it is adequate to
have 5 speakers (front left/right, rear left/right,
center) and 1 subwoofer. CSO (Center Speaker
Organizer) allows you to create a virtual center
speaker even though a real center speaker is not
connected.
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound,” then “Listening
Position.”
3
Touch “Custom,” then “Custom Tune.”
The setting display appears.
Back
ATT
Top
Position Tune
100
100
100
100
1
During disc/USB playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
Touch “CSO.”
The options appear.
4
Touch “CSO1,” “CSO2” or “CSO3.”
The setting is complete.
100
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
(cm)
Reset
15
4
5
OK
12:00
Touch +/– of each speaker to set the
distance between your listening
position and the speakers.
The distance is adjustable in 2 cm (13/16 in)
steps, between 0 and 400 cm (0 and 13 1/10 ft).
To restore the default setting, touch “Reset.”
Touch “OK.”
The setting is complete.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Note
The setting is applied only after “OK” is touched.
Note
“CSO” is effective only when “Multi Ch Output” is set to
“Multi” (page 54), as it is effective only for playback of
multi-channel sources.
Using rear speakers as subwoofer
— RBE
RBE (Rear Bass Enhancer) enhances the bass
sound by applying the low pass filter setting
(page 53) to rear speakers. This function allows
rear speakers to work as a subwoofer even if it is
not connected.
1
During reception/playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “RBE.”
The options appear.
4
Touch “RBE1,” “RBE2” or “RBE3.”
The setting is complete.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
46
Adjusting the speaker volume
Monitor Adjustment
You can adjust the volume level of each
connected speaker.
The adjustable speakers are “Front R” (Front
Right), “Front L” (Front Left), “Surround L”
(Rear Left), “Surround R” (Rear Right) and
“Subwoofer*.”
Adjusting the monitor angle
* Adjustable only when a subwoofer is connected and
“Subwoofer” is set to “ON” (page 52).
1
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
2
Touch “Sound.”
The sound setting menu appears.
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “4.1ch
Speaker Level.”
The setting display appears.
You can adjust the monitor angle for best
viewing.
1
2
Touch “Source List,” then
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “Monitor
Angle.”
The setting display appears.
4
Touch –/+ to adjust the angle.
The adjustment is stored.
The monitor retains the angle even after the
front panel is opened and closed.
.
Touch “General.”
The general setting menu appears.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Back
ATT
Top
4.1ch Speaker Level
Front L
Front R
Surround L
Surround R
Touch panel calibration
Touch panel calibration is required if the
touching position does not correspond with the
proper item.
Subwoofer
0
Reset
12:00
4
Touch the speaker, then +/– to adjust
the level.
Repeat this step to adjust all speaker volume.
To restore the default setting, touch “Reset.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
1
2
Touch “Source List,” then
3
Touch v/V to scroll, then “Touch Panel
Adjust.”
The setting display appears.
4
Touch the targets in sequence.
The calibration is complete.
.
Touch “General.”
The general setting menu appears.
To cancel calibration, touch “Cancel.”
47
Setting the background screen
You can select the screen theme, visualizer and
picture brightness for the background screen
according to your preference.
The options “Custom 1” and “Custom 2” of
Picture EQ allow you to make your own picture
quality setting by adjusting the picture tones.
1
2
Touch “Source List,” then
1
During video/image playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
Touch “Screen,” then “Picture EQ.”
3
Touch “Screen Select.”
The options appear.
2
3
4
Select the screen theme.
Touch “Screen Theme,” then the desired type.
5
Select the visualizer.
Touch “Visualizer,” then the desired type.
6
Select the picture brightness.
Touch “Day / Night mode,” then one of the
following options.
.
Touch “Screen.”
The screen setting menu appears.
Touch “Custom 1” or “Custom 2,” then
“Custom Tune.”
The setting display appears.
Back
ATT
Top
Picture EQ : Custom Tune
Warm
“Auto”: Switches the brightness
automatically when you turn the lights on.
(Available only when the illumination control
lead is connected.)
“Always Day”: Fixes the brightness suitable
for day time use.
“Always Night”: Fixes the brightness
suitable for night time use.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Selecting the picture quality
— Picture EQ
You can select a picture quality suitable for the
interior brightness of the car.
The options are indicated below.
“Dynamic”: Vivid picture with bright, clear
colors.
“Standard”: Standard picture quality.
“Theater”: Brightens the monitor; suitable for
darkly-lit movies.
“Sepia”: Applies a sepia tone to the picture.
“Custom 1,” “Custom 2”: User-adjustable
settings (page 48).
1
During video/image playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
2
Touch “Screen.”
The screen setting menu appears.
3
Touch “Picture EQ.”
The options appear.
4
Touch the desired option.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
48
Customizing the picture quality
Normal
Cool
Color Tone
Brightness
0
15
Color
0
12:00
4
Touch “Warm,” “Normal,” or “Cool” to
select “Color Tone.”
5
Touch +/– of “Brightness” and “Color”
to adjust their levels.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Note
The picture quality of the rear view camera cannot be
adjusted.
Selecting the aspect ratio
You can change the screen aspect ratio.
The options are indicated below.
“Normal”: Picture with 4:3
aspect ratio (regular picture).
“Wide”: Picture with 4:3
aspect ratio enlarged to the left
and right edges of the screen,
with overflowing parts of top
and bottom cut off to fill the
screen.
“Full”: Picture with 16:9
aspect ratio.
Settings
The setting menu includes the following
categories.
•
•
•
•
“General”: General settings (page 50)
“Sound”: Sound settings (page 52)
“Screen”: Screen settings (page 53)
“Visual”: DVD and other playback settings
(page 54)
Basic setting operation
You can set items in the menu by the following
procedure.
E.g., when setting the demonstration
1
“Zoom”: Picture with 4:3
aspect ratio enlarged to the left
and right edges of the screen.
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
From the top menu, touch
.
The setting menu appears.
Back
ATT
Top
1
During video/image playback, touch
“Source List,” then
.
Security Control
2
Touch “Screen.”
The screen setting menu appears.
Auto OFF
No
CT
OFF / ON
3
Touch “Aspect.”
The options appear.
4
Clock Adjust
Output Color System
General
1/4
NTSC / PAL
Sound
Screen
15
Touch the desired option.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Locked
2
Note
The screen aspect ratio of the rear view camera
cannot be changed.
Visual
12:00
Touch “Screen.”
The screen setting display appears.
Back
ATT
Top
Screen Select
Picture EQ
Dynamic
Aspect
Full
Clock
OFF / ON
Demo
OFF / ON
General
Sound
15
3
Screen
Visual
12:00
Touch “Demo” to set to “ON” or “OFF.”
The setting is complete.
To scroll the options (only when required), touch
v/V.
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
49
General settings
Touch
c “General” c the desired item c the desired option. For details on this procedure, see
“Basic setting operation” on page 49.
Follow the page reference for details. “z” indicates the default setting.
Item
Option
Purpose
Unit status
Security Control (page 57)
–
–
Any status.
Clock Adjust (page 57)
–
–
Any status.
No (z)
Auto OFF
Shuts off automatically after a
desired time when the unit is
30sec, 30min,
off.
To deactivate the Auto Off
function.
CT (Clock Time) (page 21, 22) ON
To activate the CT function.
Any status.
To select the desired time.
60min
OFF (z)
To deactivate the CT
function.
Output Color System
Changes the color system
according to the connected
monitor.
(SECAM is not supported.)
PAL (z)
To set to PAL.
NTSC
To set to NTSC.
Dimmer
Changes the display
brightness.
Auto (z)
To dim the display
automatically when you
turn lights on. (Available
only when the illumination
control lead is connected.)
ON
Any status.
Unit off.
Any status.
To dim the display.
(–5 ~ +5)
Dimmer Level
Sets the brightness level when z: 0
the dimmer is activated.
To select the level.
Touch Panel Adjust
(page 47)
–
–
Beep
ON (z)
To activate the operation
sound.
OFF
To deactivate the operation
sound.
English (z),
Español,
Русский
To select the display
language.
Any status.
Any status.
Any status.
Language
50
Unit off.
Item
Key Illumination
Option
Purpose
ON (z)
To turn on the button
illumination.
OFF
To turn off the button
illumination.
Unit status
Any status.
Default (z)
Rotary Commander
Changes the operative
direction of rotary commander
Reverse
controls.
To use in the factory-set
position.
AUX1 Input (page 57)
Sets the type of device
connected to the AUX1 IN
terminals to switch the
background screen
accordingly.
Video (z)
To show the picture from
the connected device.
Audio
To show this unit’s
background screen.
OFF
To deactivate the AUX
input.
AUX2 Input (page 57)
Sets the type of device
connected to the AUX2 IN
terminals to switch the
background screen
accordingly.
Video (z)
To show the picture from
the connected device.
Audio
To show this unit’s
background screen.
OFF
To deactivate the AUX
input.
No Signal
Changes the screen
automatically when no
external video signal is
detected.
Through
To show the no signal
screen.
Blank (z)
To show the audio playback
screen with no signal
notification.
Any status.
To use on the right side of
the steering column.
OFF
Camera Input
Activates the video input from
ON (z)
the connected rear view
camera.
To deactivate the input.
Rear View Camera Setting –
(page 58)
–
Monitor Angle (page 47)
–
–
To show the picture from
the rear view camera when
the back lamp lights up (or
the shift lever is set to the R
(reverse) position).
Unit off.
Unit off.
Unit off.
Any status.
Any status.
Any status.
51
Sound settings
Touch
c “Sound” c the desired item c the desired option. For details on this procedure, see “Basic
setting operation” on page 49.
Follow the page reference for details. “z” indicates the default setting.
Item
EQ7 (page 44)
Option
Purpose
OFF (z)
To cancel the equalizer
curve.
Xplod, Vocal,
To select the equalizer
Edge, Cruise, curve; customize the
Space, Gravity, equalizer curve.
Custom
Balance/Fader (page 45)
Balance:
(–15 ~ +15)
Fader:
(–15 ~ +15)
z: 0
To adjust the level.
Subwoofer:
(–6 ~ +6)
z: 0
To adjust the volume level
of subwoofer. (Available
only when “Subwoofer” is
set to “ON.”)
Listening Position (page 45) OFF (z)
Sets the listening position and
subwoofer position.
CSO (Center Speaker
Organizer) (page 46)
Sets the virtual center speaker
mode.
To set to front left.
Front R
To set to front right.
Front
To set to center front.
All
To set to the center of your
car.
Custom
To precisely calibrate the
listening position
(page 46).
Subwoofer:
Near,
Normal (z),
Far
To select the subwoofer
position. (Available only
when “Subwoofer” is set to
“ON,” and the listening
position is set to “Front L,”
“Front R,” “Front” or
“All.”)
OFF (z),
CSO1, CSO2,
CSO3
To select the mode.
OFF
52
During reception/
playback.
During reception/
playback.
To not set the listening
position.
Front L
ON (z)
Subwoofer
Sets the subwoofer connection
status.
Unit status
During reception/
playback.
During disc/USB
playback.
To set the connection status
to on.
Unit off.
To set the connection status
to off.
Item
Option
Purpose
RBE (Rear Bass Enhancer)
(page 46)
Uses rear speakers as a
subwoofer.
OFF (z),
RBE1, RBE2,
RBE3
To select the mode.
Crossover Filter
Selects the cut-off frequency
of the front/rear speakers
(HPF) and subwoofer (LPF).
LPF: 50 Hz,
60 Hz, 80 Hz,
100 Hz (z),
120 Hz
To select the cut-off
frequency. (Available only
when “Subwoofer” is set to
“ON.”)
HPF: OFF (z)
To not cut out the
frequency.
During reception/
playback.
HPF: 50 Hz,
To select the cut-off
60 Hz, 80 Hz,
frequency.
100 Hz, 120 Hz
4.1ch Speaker Level
(page 47)
Unit status
Subwoofer
Phase:
Normal (z),
Reverse
To select the subwoofer
phase. (Available only
when “Subwoofer” is set to
“ON.”)
–
–
During reception/
playback.
Unit off.
Screen settings
Touch
c “Screen” c the desired item c the desired option. For details on this procedure, see “Basic
setting operation” on page 49.
Follow the page reference for details. “z” indicates the default setting.
Item
Option
Purpose
Unit status
Screen Select (page 48)
–
–
Any status.
Picture EQ (page 48)
Dynamic (z),
Standard,
Theater, Sepia
To select the picture
quality.
Custom 1,
Custom 2
To customize the picture
quality.
Full (z),
Normal,
Wide,
Zoom
To select the screen aspect
ratio.
Aspect (page 49)
ON (z)
Clock
Shows/hides the clock display
OFF
in the bottom right corner of
the display.
Demo
During video/
image playback.
During video/
image playback.
To show the clock display.
To hide the clock display.
ON (z)
To activate the
demonstration.
OFF
To deactivate the
demonstration.
Any status.
Unit off.
53
DVD and other playback settings
Touch
c “Visual” c the desired item c the desired option. For details on this procedure, see “Basic
setting operation” on page 49.
Follow the page reference for details. “z” indicates the default setting.
Item
Option
Purpose
Unit status
DVD Menu Language
–
To change the disc’s menu
language.
Unit off.
DVD Audio Language
–
To change the soundtrack
language.
Unit off.
DVD Subtitle Language
–
To change the subtitle
language recorded on the
disc.
Unit off.
Audio DRC
Makes the sound clear when
the volume is low. Only for a
DVD* conforming to Audio
DRC (Dynamic Range
Control).
Standard (z)
To select the standard
setting.
Wide
To obtain the feeling of
being at a live performance.
Unit off.
* Excluding DVD-R/DVD-R DL/
DVD-RW in VR mode.
Multi Ch Output
Switches the method of
outputting multi channel
sources.
Multi (z)
To output in 4.1 channels.
Stereo
To downmix to 2 channels.
DVD Parental Control
(page 24)
–
To lock/unlock a disc.
DVD Parental Rating
(page 24)
–
To set the restriction level
according to the selected
area.
Unit off.
To set the restriction
standard by area.
Unit off.
DVD Parental Area (page 24) –
54
DVD Playlist Play
(For DVD-R/DVD-R DL/
DVD-RW in VR mode only)
Original (z)
To play originally recorded
titles.
Playlist
To play an edited playlist.
DVD Direct Search
(page 25)
Sets the search item of DVD
direct search play.
Chapter (z)
To search for a chapter.
Title
To search for a title.
Unit off.
Unit off.
Unit off.
Any status.
Item
Option
16:9 (z)
Monitor Type
Selects an aspect ratio suitable
for the connected monitor.
(The screen aspect ratio of this
unit also changes.)
Depending on the disc, “4:3
Letter Box” may be selected
automatically instead of “4:3
Pan Scan,” and vice versa.
4:3 Letter Box
Purpose
Unit status
To display the wide picture.
Suitable when connecting
to a wide-screen monitor or
a monitor with a wide
mode function.
To display a wide picture
with bands on the upper
and lower positions of the
screen.
Suitable when connecting
to a 4:3 screen monitor.
4:3 Pan Scan
To display a wide picture
on the entire screen and
automatically cut off the
portions that do not fit.
ZAPPIN Time (page 33)
6sec, 15sec
(z), 30sec
To select the playback time
for the ZAPPIN function.
ZAPPIN Tone (page 33)
ON (z)
To have the beep sound
between track passages.
OFF
To deactivate the beep
sound.
ON (z)
To store the resume settings
in memory for up to 5
video* discs.
Multi Disc Resume
* DVD VIDEO/VCD/DivX/
MPEG-4 only.
USB Resume
JPEG Slide Show
Video CD PBC (page 22)
OFF
To not store the resume
settings in memory.
Resume playback is
available only for the
current disc in the unit.
ON (z)
To store resume settings in
memory for DivX/MPEG-4
files in the USB device.
OFF
To not store the resume
settings in memory.
5sec (z),
20sec, 60sec,
Fixed
To select the slide show
interval.
ON (z)
To play VCD with the PBC
function.
OFF
To play VCD without the
PBC function.
Unit off.
During audio
playback.
During audio
playback.
Unit off.
Unit off.
Unit off.
Unit off.
continue to next page t
55
Item
DivX VOD Registration
Code
Displays the registration code
for this unit. For details, see
page 61.
Option
Purpose
Done
To close the display.
DivX VOD Deactivate Code Done
Deactivates this unit’s
registration for DivX VOD
playback.
Unit status
Unit off.
To close the display.
Unit off.
Note
If parental control is applied, resume playback will not work. In this case, playback starts from the beginning of the
disc when it is inserted.
56
Setting the security code
Using Optional Equipment
This unit has a security function to discourage
theft. Enter a 4-digit number as your security
code.
Once the security function is activated, you need
to enter the security code to turn on the unit after
re-installing the unit in another car or charging
the battery.
You can connect up to 2 optional devices, such as
portable media player, game, etc., to the AUX1
IN and AUX2 IN terminals on the unit.
Activating the security function
Selecting auxiliary device
1
Touch “Source List,” then
.
The general setting menu appears. If not,
touch “General.”
1
2
Touch “Security Control.”
The security code setting display appears.
3
Touch the number keys to enter your
security code, then “OK.”
4
To confirm, touch the number keys to
reenter your security code, then “OK.”
The setting is complete.
Auxiliary audio/video
equipment
Touch “Source List,” then “AUX.”
The AUX playback display appears.
Source List
AUX1
ATT
Top
AUX2
Level 0
To delete an entered number, touch “Clear.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
The 4-digit input prompt appears when you turn
on the unit after re-installing in another car or
charging the battery. Touch the number keys to
enter your security code.
Deactivating the security function
1 Follow steps 1 to 2 above.
The security unlock display appears.
2 Touch the number keys to enter your security
code.
“Unlocked” appears, and the security function
is deactivated.
Setting the clock
The clock uses a 12-hour indication.
1
Touch “Source List,” then
.
The general setting menu appears. If not,
touch “General.”
2
Touch “Clock Adjust.”
The setting display appears.
3
4
Touch “AM” or “PM.”
5
Touch “OK.”
The setting is complete.
15
2
12:00
Touch “AUX1” or “AUX2” to select the
device.
Operate by the portable device itself.
Adjusting the volume level
Be sure to adjust the volume for each connected
device before playback.
The volume level is common to “AUX1” and
“AUX2.”
1
2
Reduce the volume on the unit.
3
Start playback of the portable device
at a moderate volume.
4
Set your usual listening volume on the
unit.
5
Touch –/+ in the “Level” box
repeatedly to adjust the level.
The level is adjustable in single steps,
between –8 and +18.
Touch “Source List,” then “AUX.”
The AUX playback display appears.
continue to next page t
Set the hour and minute.
For example, to set to 8:30, touch “0830.”
To delete an entered number, touch “Clear.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
57
Setting the type of device
By setting the type (video or audio) of each
connected device, the background screen can be
switched accordingly.
1
While the unit is off, touch “Source
List,” then
.
The general setting menu appears. If not,
touch “General.”
2
Touch v/V to scroll, then “AUX1 Input”
or “AUX2 Input.”
3
Touch “Audio” or “Video.”
The setting is complete.
To deactivate the AUX input, select “OFF.”
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Rear view camera settings
You can display setting items on the picture from
the rear view camera to assist operation.
This setting is available only when:
– “Camera Input” is set to “ON” (page 51).
– the parking brake is applied.
1
Touch “Source List,” then
.
The general setting menu appears. If not,
touch “General.”
2
Touch v/V to scroll, then “Rear View
Camera Setting.”
The setting items appear.
Marker
Back
Rear view camera
Mirror
1
By connecting the optional rear view camera to
the CAMERA IN terminal, you can display the
picture from the rear view camera.
The picture from rear view camera appears when
the back lamp lights up (or the shift lever is set to
the R (reverse) position).
Notes
• When backing up your car, watch the surroundings
carefully for safety. Do not depend on the rear view
camera exclusively.
• The picture from a rear view camera does not
appear in the rear monitor.
Tip
Even if a rear view camera is connected, you can set
to not display the picture from a rear view camera by
deactivating the camera input (page 51).
2
3
Line Edit
Turn off engine but keep the key in the “IGN” position.
Displaying marker lines
Touch “Marker.”
Touch “Marker” again to hide the marker lines.
Reversing the picture
Touch “Mirror.”
A mirror reversed picture appears.
Editing lines
1 Touch “Line Edit.”
Back
1 Edit
1
2 Edit
3 Edit
Turn off engine but keep the key in the “IGN” position.
2
3
Reset
2 Select the line to edit.
Touch “1 Edit,” “2 Edit” or “3 Edit”
corresponding to the line to edit.
3 Edit the line.
To increase the length, touch B b.
To reduce the length, touch bB.
To adjust the position, touch V or v.
To restore the default setting, touch “Reset.”
58
To return to the previous display, touch “Back.”
Additional Information
Precautions
• Cool off the unit beforehand if your car has been
parked in direct sunlight.
• Power antenna (aerial) extends automatically.
Moisture condensation
Should moisture condensation occur inside the unit,
remove the disc and wait for about an hour for it to
dry out; otherwise the unit will not operate properly.
To maintain high sound quality
• This unit is designed to play back discs that
conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.
DualDiscs and some of the music discs encoded
with copyright protection technologies do not
conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard,
therefore, these discs may not be playable by this
unit.
• Discs that this unit CANNOT play
– Discs with labels, stickers, or sticky tape or
paper attached. Doing so may cause a
malfunction, or may ruin the disc.
– Discs with non-standard shapes (e.g., heart,
square, star). Attempting to do so may damage
the unit.
– 8 cm (3 1/4 in) discs.
Do not splash liquid onto the unit or discs.
Note on playback operations of DVDs
and VCDs
Notes on LCD panel
Some playback operations of DVDs and VCDs may
be intentionally set by software producers. Since
this unit plays DVDs and VCDs according to the
disc contents the software producers designed, some
playback features may not be available. Also, refer
to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or
VCDs.
• Do not press on the LCD panel as doing so can
distort the picture or cause a malfunction (i.e., the
picture may become unclear, or the LCD panel
may be damaged).
• Do not touch other than with the finger, as it may
damage or break the LCD panel.
• Clean the LCD panel with a dry soft cloth. Do not
use solvents such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available cleaners, or antistatic
spray.
• Do not use this unit outside the temperature range
5 – 45 ºC (41 – 113 ºF).
• If your car was parked in a cold or hot place, the
picture may not be clear. However, the monitor is
not damaged, and the picture will become clear
after the temperature in your car becomes normal.
• Some stationary blue, red or green dots may
appear on the monitor. These are called “bright
spots,” and can happen with any LCD. The LCD
panel is precision-manufactured with more than
99.99 % of its segments functional. However, it is
possible that a small percentage (typically 0.01 %)
of the segments may not light up properly. This
will not, however, interfere with your viewing.
Notes on discs
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources such as hot air ducts, nor leave it in a car
parked in direct sunlight.
• Before playing, wipe the discs
with a cleaning cloth from the
center out. Do not use solvents
such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available
cleaners.
Notes on DATA CDs and DATA DVDs
• Some DATA CDs/DATA DVDs (depending on the
equipment used for its recording, or the disc
condition) may not play on this unit.
• Finalization is required for some discs (page 60).
• The unit is compatible with the following
standards.
For DATA CDs
– ISO 9660 level 1/level 2 format, Joliet/Romeo in
the expansion format
– Multi Session
For DATA DVDs
– UDF Bridge format (combined UDF and ISO
9660)
– Multi Border
• The maximum number of:
– folders (albums): 256 (including root and empty
folders).
– files (tracks/images/videos) and folders
contained in a disc: 2,000 (if a folder/file names
contain many characters, this number may
become less than 2,000).
– displayable characters for a folder/file name: 64
(Joliet/Romeo).
continue to next page t
59
Notes on finalizing discs
The following discs are required to be finalized to
play on this unit.
• DVD-R/DVD-R DL (in video mode/VR mode)
• DVD-RW in video mode
• DVD+R/DVD+R DL
• CD-R
• CD-RW
The following discs can be played without
finalization.
• DVD+RW – automatically finalized.
• DVD-RW in VR mode – finalization not required.
For details, see the manual supplied with the disc.
Notes on Multi Session CDs/Multi
Border DVDs
This unit can play Multi Session CDs/Multi Border
DVDs under the following conditions. Note that the
session must be closed and the disc must be
finalized.
• When CD-DA (Compact Disc Digital Audio) is
recorded in the first session:
The unit recognizes the disc as CD-DA and only
CD-DA of the first session is played, even if an
other format (e.g., MP3) is recorded in other
sessions.
• When CD-DA is recorded other than in the first
session:
The unit recognizes the disc as a DATA CD or
DATA DVD, and all CD-DA sessions are skipped.
• When an MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4
is recorded:
Only the sessions containing the selected file type
(audio/video/image)* are played (if CD-DA or
other data exists in other sessions, they are
skipped).
About MP3 files
• MP3, which stands for MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3, is
a music file compression format standard. It
compresses audio CD data to approximately 1/10
of its original size.
• ID3 tag versions 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 apply to
MP3 only. ID3 tag is 15/30 characters (1.0 and
1.1), or 63/126 characters (2.2, 2.3 and 2.4).
• When naming an MP3 file, be sure to add the file
extension “.mp3” to the file name.
• During playback or fast-forward/reverse of a VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) MP3 file, elapsed playback
time may not display accurately.
Note on MP3
If you play a high-bit-rate MP3, such as 192 kbps,
sound may be intermittent.
About WMA files
• WMA, which stands for Windows Media Audio,
is a music file compression format standard. It
compresses audio CD data to approximately 1/22*
of its original size.
• WMA tag is 63 characters.
• When naming a WMA file, be sure to add the file
extension “.wma” to the file name.
• During playback or fast-forward/reverse of a VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) WMA file, elapsed playback
time may not display accurately.
* only for 64 kbps
Note on WMA
Playback of the following WMA files is not supported.
– lossless compression
– copyright-protected
* For details on how to select the file type, see
page 33.
About AAC files
Playback order of MP3/WMA/AAC/
JPEG/DivX®/MPEG-4 files
• AAC tag is 126 characters.
• When naming an AAC file, be sure to add the file
extension “.m4a” to the file name.
MP3/WMA/AAC/
JPEG/DivX/
MPEG-4
Folder
(album)
MP3/WMA/AAC/
JPEG/DivX/
MPEG-4 file
(track/image/
video)
About JPEG files
• JPEG, which stands for Joint Photographic
Experts Group, is an image file compression
format standard. It compresses still images
approximately 1/10 to 1/100 of original size.
• When naming a JPEG file, be sure to add the file
extension “.jpg” to the file name.
Note on JPEG
Playback of progressive JPEG files is not supported.
About DivX video
60
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,
Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert files
into DivX video.
About DivX Video-on-Demand
®
This DivX Certified device must be registered
in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code, locate
the DivX VOD section in the visual setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete
the registration process and learn more about
DivX VOD.
About MPEG-4 files
MPEG-4 files meeting the following
requirements can be played. Playback is not be
guaranteed for all MPEG-4 files meeting the
requirements.
• Profile: MPEG-4 Simple profile
• Bit rate: Max. 7 Mbps on USB FS, 10 Mbps on
DVD, 7 Mbps on CD
• Frame rate: Max. 30 fps
• Image size: Max. 720 × 480 pixels
• Audio: Max. 320 kbps (AAC-LC)
• File extension: .mp4
About iPod
• You can connect to the following iPod models.
Update your iPod devices to the latest software
before use.
Made for
– iPod touch (2nd generation)
– iPod touch (1st generation)
– iPod classic
– iPod with video*
– iPod nano (5th generation)
– iPod nano (4th generation)
– iPod nano (3rd generation)
– iPod nano (2nd generation)
– iPod nano (1st generation)*
Works with
– iPhone
– iPhone 3G
– iPhone 3GS
* Passenger control is not available for iPod nano (1st
generation) or iPod with video.
• “Made for iPod” means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
• “Works with iPhone” means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
• Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
About Bluetooth function
What is Bluetooth technology?
• Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range
wireless technology that enables wireless data
communication between digital devices, such as a
cellular phone and a headset. Bluetooth wireless
technology operates within a range of about 10 m
(about 33 feet). Connecting two devices is
common, but some devices can be connected to
multiple devices at the same time.
• You do not need to use a cable for connection
since Bluetooth technology is a wireless
technology, neither is it necessary for the devices
to face one another, such is the case with infrared
technology. For example, you can use such a
device in a bag or pocket.
• Bluetooth technology is an international standard
supported by millions of companies all over the
world, and employed by various companies
worldwide.
On Bluetooth communication
• Bluetooth wireless technology operates within a
range of about 10 m.
Maximum communication range may vary
depending on obstacles (person, metal, wall, etc.)
or electromagnetic environment.
• The following conditions may affect the
sensitivity of Bluetooth communication.
– There is an obstacle such as a person, metal, or
wall between this unit and Bluetooth device.
– A device using 2.4 GHz frequency, such as a
wireless LAN device, cordless telephone, or
microwave oven, is in use near this unit.
• Because Bluetooth devices and wireless LAN
(IEEE802.11b/g) use the same frequency,
microwave interference may occur and result in
communication speed deterioration, noise, or
invalid connection if this unit is used near a
wireless LAN device. In such as case, perform the
following.
– Use this unit at least 10 m away from the
wireless LAN device.
– If this unit is used within 10 m of a wireless
LAN device, turn off the wireless LAN device.
– Install this unit and Bluetooth device as near to
each other as possible.
• Microwaves emitting from a Bluetooth device may
affect the operation of electronic medical devices.
Turn off this unit and other Bluetooth devices in
the following locations, as it may cause an
accident.
– where inflammable gas is present, in a hospital,
train, airplane, or petrol station
– near automatic doors or a fire alarm
• This unit supports security capabilities that
comply with the Bluetooth standard to provide a
secure connection when the Bluetooth wireless
technology is used, but security may not be
enough depending on the setting. Be careful when
communicating using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
continue to next page t
61
• We do not take any responsibility for the leakage
of information during Bluetooth communication.
• Connection with all Bluetooth devices cannot be
guaranteed.
– A device featuring Bluetooth function is
required to conform to the Bluetooth standard
specified by Bluetooth SIG, and be
authenticated.
– Even if the connected device conforms to the
above mentioned Bluetooth standard, some
devices may not be connected or work correctly,
depending on the features or specifications of the
device.
– While talking on the phone handsfree, noise may
occur, depending on the device or
communication environment.
• Depending on the device to be connected, it may
require some time to start communication.
Others
• Using the Bluetooth device may not function on
cellular phones, depending on radio wave
conditions and location where the equipment is
being used.
• If you experience discomfort after using the
Bluetooth device, stop using the Bluetooth device
immediately. Should any problem persist, consult
your nearest Sony dealer.
WARNING
Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of
in fire.
Fuse replacement
When replacing the fuse, be
sure to use one matching the
amperage rating stated on the
original fuse. If the fuse blows,
check the power connection and
replace the fuse. If the fuse
blows again after replacement,
there may be an internal
malfunction. In such a case,
consult your nearest Sony
dealer.
Fuse (10A)
Removing the unit
1
Insert both release keys
simultaneously until they click.
If you have any questions or problems concerning
your unit that are not covered in this manual, consult
your nearest Sony dealer.
Maintenance
Hook facing
inwards.
Replacing the lithium battery of the
card remote commander
Under normal conditions, the battery will last
approximately 1 year. (The service life may be
shorter, depending on the conditions of use.)
When the battery becomes weak, the range of the
card remote commander becomes shorter. Replace
the battery with a new CR2025 lithium battery. Use
of any other battery may present a risk of fire or
explosion.
2
Pull the release keys to unseat the
unit.
3
Slide the unit out of the mounting.
+ side up
c
Notes on the lithium battery
• Keep the lithium battery out of the reach of children.
Should the battery be swallowed, immediately
consult a doctor.
• Wipe the battery with a dry cloth to assure a good
contact.
• Be sure to observe the correct polarity when
installing the battery.
• Do not hold the battery with metallic tweezers,
otherwise a short-circuit may occur.
62
Specifications
Monitor section
Display type: Wide LCD color monitor
Dimensions: 7.0 in
System: TFT active matrix
Number of pixels: 1,152,000 pixels
Color system:
PAL/NTSC/SECAM/PAL-M automatic select
Tuner section
*1 The actual range will vary depending on factors
such as obstacles between devices, magnetic
fields around a microwave oven, static electricity,
reception sensitivity, antenna’s performance,
operating system, software application, etc.
*2 Bluetooth standard profiles indicate the purpose of
Bluetooth communication between devices.
Power amplifier section
Outputs: Speaker outputs
Speaker impedance: 4 – 8 ohms
Maximum power output: 52 W × 4 (at 4 ohms)
FM
General
Tuning range:
87.5 – 108.0 MHz (at 50 kHz step)
Antenna (aerial) terminal:
External antenna (aerial) connector
Intermediate frequency: 150 kHz
Usable sensitivity: 10 dBf
Selectivity: 75 dB at 400 kHz
Signal-to-noise ratio: 70 dB (mono)
Separation: 40 dB at 1 kHz
Frequency response: 20 – 15,000 Hz
Outputs:
Video output terminal (rear)
Audio output terminals (front/rear)
Subwoofer output terminal
Power antenna (aerial) relay control terminal
Power amplifier control terminal
Inputs:
Telephone ATT control terminal
Illumination control terminal
Remote controller input terminal
Antenna (aerial) input terminal
Parking break control terminal
Microphone input terminal
Reverse input terminal
Camera input terminal
AUX audio input terminals
AUX video input terminals
USB signal input connector
External input terminal
Power requirements: 12 V DC car battery
(negative ground (earth))
Dimensions: Approx. 178 × 100 × 189 mm
(7 1/8 × 4 × 7 1/2 in) (w/h/d)
Mounting dimensions: Approx. 182 × 111 × 164 mm
(7 1/4 × 4 3/8 × 6 1/2 in) (w/h/d)
Mass: Approx. 2.5 kg (5 lb 9 oz)
Supplied accessories:
Card remote commander: RM-X170
Parts for installation and connections (1 set)
Extension cord for AUX audio/video input
terminals
Microphone: XA-MC10
CD-ROM (Application disc)
Optional accessories/equipment:
Mobile monitor: XVM-B62
USB connection cable for iPod: RC-200IPV
Rear View Camera: XA-R800C
AM
Tuning range:
531 – 1,602 kHz (at 9 kHz step)
Antenna (aerial) terminal:
External antenna (aerial) connector
Intermediate frequency: 25 kHz
Sensitivity: 26 µV
DVD/CD Player section
Signal-to-noise ratio: 120 dB
Frequency response: 10 – 20,000 Hz
Wow and flutter: Below measurable limit
Harmonic distortion: 0.01 %
Region code: Labeled on the bottom of the unit
USB Player section
Interface: USB (Full-speed)
Maximum current: 500 mA
Wireless Communication
Communication System:
Bluetooth Standard version 2.0 + EDR
Output:
Bluetooth Standard Power Class 2 (Max. +4 dBm)
Maximum communication range:
Line of sight approx. 10 m (33 ft)*1
Frequency band:
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 – 2.4835 GHz)
Modulation method: FHSS
Compatible Bluetooth Profiles*2:
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.3
HFP (Handsfree Profile) 1.5
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Your dealer may not handle some of the above listed
accessories. Please ask the dealer for detailed
information.
US and foreign patents licensed from Dolby
Laboratories.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology and
patents licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
continue to next page t
63
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary.
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
• Halogenated flame retardants are not used in the
certain printed wiring boards.
• Halogenated flame retardants are not used in
cabinets.
• Packaging cushions are made from paper.
Region code
The region system is used to protect software
copyrights.
The region code is located on the bottom of the unit,
and only DVDs labeled with an identical region code
can be played on this unit.
DVDs labeled ALL can also be played.
If you try to play any other DVD, the message
“Playback prohibited by region code.” will appear on
the monitor screen. Depending on the DVD, no region
code may be labeled even though playing the DVD is
prohibited by area restrictions.
System requirements for the software
in the supplied CD-ROM
Computer
• CPU/RAM
– IBM PC/AT compatible machine
– CPU: Intel Pentium III Processor 450 MHz or
higher
– RAM: 256 MB or more (For Windows XP), 512
MB or more (For Windows Vista or later)
• CD-ROM drive
• USB port
OS
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
For details on compatible editions or Service Pack, visit
the following support site:
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
Monitor
High color (16-bit) or more, 800 × 600 dots or more
Other
Internet connection
64
Notes
• The following system environments are not
supported.
– Non IBM PC type computers, such as Macintosh,
etc.
– Homemade computers
– OS upgraded computers
– Multi-display environment
– Multi-boot environment
– Virtual machine environment
• Depending on the computer condition, operation
may not be possible even with the recommended
environment.
Troubleshooting
The following checklist will help you remedy
problems you may encounter with your unit.
Before going through the checklist below, check the
connection and operating procedures.
If the problem is not solved, visit the following
support site.
Support site
http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support
http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/
General
No power is being supplied to the unit.
• Check the connection or fuse.
• If the unit is turned off and the display disappears, it
cannot be operated with the remote commander.
t Turn on the unit.
The power antenna (aerial) does not extend.
The power antenna (aerial) does not have a relay box.
No beep sound.
• The beep sound is canceled (page 50).
• An optional power amplifier is connected and you are
not using the built-in amplifier.
The contents of the memory have been erased.
• The reset button has been pressed.
t Store again into the memory.
• The power supply lead or battery has been
disconnected or it is not connected properly.
Stored stations and correct time are erased.
The fuse has blown.
Makes noise when the position of the ignition
is switched.
The leads are not matched correctly with the car’s
accessory power connector.
The display disappears from/does not appear
on the monitor.
• The dimmer is set to “ON” (page 50).
• The display disappears if you press and hold
(SOURCE/OFF).
t Press (SOURCE/OFF) on the unit until the
display appears.
• “M.OFF” is touched and the Monitor Off function
is activated (page 11).
t Touch anywhere on the display to turn back on.
The display does not respond to your touch
correctly.
• Touch one part of the display at a time. If two or more
parts are touched simultaneously, the display will not
operate correctly.
• Adjust the touch point of the display (page 47).
The Auto Off function does not operate.
The unit is turned on. The Auto Off function activates
after turning off the unit.
t Turn off the unit.
Card remote commander operation is not
possible.
If the Monitor Off function is activated (no lighting),
card remote commander operation is not possible
(page 11).
The menu items cannot be selected.
Unavailable menu items are shown in grey.
AUX cannot be selected as the source.
All AUX input settings are set to “OFF.”
t Set “AUX1 Input”/“AUX2 Input” to “Video” or
“Audio” (page 58).
Radio reception
The stations cannot be received.
The sound is hampered by noises.
• The connection is not correct.
t Connect a power antenna (aerial) control lead
(blue) or accessory power supply lead (red) to the
power supply lead of a car’s antenna (aerial)
booster (only when your car has built-in FM/AM
antenna (aerial) in the rear/side glass).
t Check the connection of the car antenna (aerial).
t If the auto antenna (aerial) will not go up, check
the connection of the power antenna (aerial)
control lead.
Preset tuning is not possible.
• Store the correct frequency in the memory.
• The broadcast signal is too weak.
Automatic tuning is not possible.
• Setting of the local seek mode is not correct.
t Tuning stops too frequently:
Set “Local” to “ON” (page 16).
t Tuning does not stop at a station:
Set “Mono” to “ON” (page 16).
• The broadcast signal is too weak.
t Perform manual tuning.
During FM reception, the “Stereo” indication
flashes.
• Tune in the frequency accurately.
• The broadcast signal is too weak.
t Set “Mono” to “ON” (page 16).
An FM program broadcast in stereo is heard in
monaural.
The unit is in monaural reception mode.
t Set “Mono” to “OFF” (page 16).
RDS
PTY displays “None.”
• The current station is not an RDS station.
• RDS data has not been received.
• The station does not specify the program type.
Picture
There is no picture/picture noise occurs.
• A connection has not been made correctly.
• Check the connection to the connected equipment,
and set the input selector of the equipment to the
source corresponding to this unit.
• Defective or dirty disc.
• Installation is not correct.
t Install the unit at an angle of less than 45° in a
sturdy part of the car.
• The parking cord (light green) is not connected to the
parking brake switch cord, or the parking brake is not
applied.
Picture does not fit in the screen.
The aspect ratio is fixed on the DVD.
There is no picture/picture noise occurs in the
rear monitor.
• The source/mode which is not connected is selected.
If there is no input, no picture appears in the rear
monitor.
• The color system setting is incorrect.
t Set the color system to “PAL” or “NTSC”
according to the connected monitor (page 50).
• The picture of the rear view camera is displayed on
this unit.
t No picture appears in the rear monitor if the
picture of the rear view camera is displayed on
this unit.
continue to next page t
65
Sound
There is no sound/sound skips/sound cracks.
• A connection has not been made correctly.
• Check the connection to the connected equipment,
and set the input selector of the equipment to the
source corresponding to this unit.
• Defective or dirty disc.
• Installation is not correct.
t Install the unit at an angle of less than 45° in a
sturdy part of the car.
• The MP3 file sampling rate is not 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz.
• The WMA file sampling rate is not 32, 44.1 or
48 kHz.
• The AAC file sampling rate is not 44.1 or 48 kHz.
• The MP3 file bit rate is not 48 to 192 kbps.
• The WMA file bit rate is not 64 to 192 kbps.
• The AAC file bit rate is not 40 to 320 kbps.
• The unit is in pause/reverse/fast-forward mode.
• The settings for the outputs are not made correctly.
• The DVD output level is too low (page 23).
• The volume is too low.
• The ATT function is activated, or the Telephone ATT
function (when the interface cable of a car telephone
is connected to the ATT lead) is activated.
• The position of the fader control “Fader” is not set for
a 2-speaker system.
• Unsupported format (such as DTS).
t Check if the format is supported by this unit
(page 9).
Sound is noisy.
Keep cords and cables away from each other.
Disc operation
The disc cannot be loaded.
• Another disc is already loaded.
• The disc has been forcibly inserted upside down or in
the wrong way.
The disc does not play back.
• Defective or dirty disc.
• The disc is not applicable.
• The DVD is not applicable due to the region code.
• The disc is not finalized (page 60).
• The disc format and file version are incompatible
with this unit (page 9, 59).
• Press Z to remove the disc.
MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4 files do
not play back.
• Recording was not performed according to the ISO
9660 level 1 or level 2, the Joliet or Romeo in the
expansion format (DATA CD), or the UDF Bridge
format (DATA DVD) (page 59).
• The file extension is incorrect (page 60).
• Files are not stored in MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/
MPEG-4 format.
• If the disc contains multiple file types, only the
selected file type (audio/video/image) can be played.
t Select the appropriate file type using the list
(page 33).
66
MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4 files take
longer to play back than others.
The following discs take a longer time to start
playback.
– a disc recorded with a complicated tree structure.
– a disc recorded in Multi Session/Multi Border.
– a disc to which data can be added.
The disc does not start playing from the
beginning.
Resume playback or multi-disc resume playback
(page 55) has taken effect.
Certain functions cannot be performed.
Depending on the disc, you may not be able to perform
operations such as stop, search, or repeat/shuffle play.
For details, see the manual supplied with the disc.
The soundtrack/subtitle language or angle
cannot be changed.
• Use the DVD menu instead of the direct selection
button on the card remote commander (page 17).
• Multilingual tracks, multilingual subtitles, or multiangles are not recorded on the DVD.
• The DVD prohibits changing.
The operation buttons do not function.
The disc will not eject.
Press the reset button (page 14).
You forgot the password for parental control.
Enter “5776” in the password input display to unlock
(page 24).
USB playback
Cannot play back items via a USB hub.
This unit cannot recognize USB devices via a USB
hub.
Cannot play back items.
Reconnect the USB device.
The USB device takes longer to play back.
The USB device contains large-sized files or files with
a complicated tree structure.
A beep sounds.
During playback, the USB device has been
disconnected.
t Before disconnecting a USB device, make sure to
stop playback first for data protection.
The sound is intermittent.
The sound may be intermittent at a high-bit-rate of
more than 320 kbps.
Bluetooth function
The other Bluetooth device cannot detect this
unit.
• Set “Signal” to “ON” (page 44).
• Set “Discoverable” to “Show” (page 44).
• While connecting to the other Bluetooth device, this
unit cannot be detected from another device.
Disconnect the current connection and search for this
unit from another device. The disconnected device
can be reconnected by selecting from the list of
registered devices.
This unit cannot detect the other Bluetooth
device.
Check the Bluetooth setting of the other device.
Connection is not possible.
• Depending on the other device, searching from this
unit may not be possible.
t Search for this unit from the other device.
• Depending on the status of the other device,
searching from this unit may not be possible.
t Search for this unit from the other device.
• Check the pairing and connection procedures in the
manual of the other device, etc., and perform the
operation again.
The name of the detected device does not
appear.
Depending on the status of the other device, it may not
be possible to obtain the name.
No ring tone.
• Raise the volume while receiving a call.
• Depending on the connecting device, the ring tone
may not be sent properly.
t Set “Ringtone” to “Default” (page 44).
The talker’s voice volume is low.
Raise the volume during a call.
The other party says that the volume is too low
or high.
Adjust the “MIC Gain” level (page 39).
Echo or noise occurs in phone call
conversations.
• Reduce the volume.
• “EC/NC Mode” is set to “OFF.”
t Set “EC/NC Mode” to “Mode 1” or “Mode 2”
(page 44).
• If ambient noise other than the phone call sound is
loud, try reducing this noise.
E.g.: If a window is open and road noise, etc., is loud,
shut the window. If the air conditioner is loud, lower
the air conditioner.
The phone sound quality is poor.
Phone sound quality depends on reception conditions
of cellular phone.
t Move your car to a place where you can enhance
the cellular phone’s signal if the reception is poor.
The volume of the connected Bluetooth device
is low or high.
Volume level will differ depending on the Bluetooth
device.
t Reduce the volume level differences between this
unit and the Bluetooth device (page 43).
No sound is output during audio streaming.
The connected Bluetooth device is paused.
t Cancel pause of the Bluetooth device.
The sound skips during audio streaming.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the
Bluetooth device.
• If the Bluetooth device is stored in a case which
interrupts the signal, remove the case while using.
• Several Bluetooth devices or other devices which
emit radio waves are used nearby.
t Turn off the other devices.
t Increase the distance from the other devices.
• The playback sound stops momentarily when this
unit is connecting to a cellular phone. This is not a
malfunction.
You cannot control the connected Bluetooth
device during audio streaming.
Check that the connected Bluetooth device supports
AVRCP.
Some functions do not work.
Check that the connecting device supports the
functions in question.
The name of the other party does not appear
when a call is received.
• The other party is not stored in the phonebook.
t Store in the phonebook (page 40).
• The calling phone is not set to send the phone
number.
A call is answered unintentionally.
• The connecting phone is set to start a call
automatically.
• “Auto Answer” of this unit is set to “Short” or
“Long” (page 44).
Pairing failed due to time out.
Depending on the connecting device, the time limit for
pairing may be short. Try completing the pairing
within the time by setting a single digit passkey.
Bluetooth function cannot be operated.
Turn off the unit by pressing (SOURCE/OFF) for 1
second, then turn on the unit.
No sound is output from the car speakers
during handsfree call.
If the sound is output from the cellular phone, set the
cellular phone to output the sound from the car
speakers.
Error displays/messages
Bluetooth device is not found.
The unit cannot detect a connectable Bluetooth device.
t Check the Bluetooth setting of the connecting
device.
Busy now… Please try again.
The unit is busy.
t Wait for a moment and try again.
Cannot read.
• The unit cannot read the data due to some problem.
• The data is damaged or corrupted.
continue to next page t
67
Cannot read disc. Disc may be corrupted.
• The disc is corrupted.
• The disc is incompatible with this unit.
• The disc is not finalized.
Disc Error
• The disc is dirty or inserted upside down.
t Clean or insert the disc correctly.
• A blank disc has been inserted.
• The disc cannot play due to a problem.
t Insert another disc.
• The disc is not compatible with this unit.
t Insert a compatible disc.
• Press Z to remove the disc.
Disc Reading...
The unit is reading all file/album (folder) information
on the disc.
t Wait until reading is complete and playback starts
automatically. Depending on the disc structure, it
may take more than a minute.
Error
• USB device was not automatically recognized.
t Reconnect it again.
• Phonebook content is changed during cellular phone
access.
t Access the phonebook again.
• Phonebook access is disconnected by the cellular
phone.
t Access the phonebook again.
• Phonebook download of the cellular phone failed due
to a problem.
t Download the phonebook again (page 40).
• Phonebook browsing of the cellular phone failed due
to a problem.
t Retry browsing (page 41).
• Phonebook listing of the cellular phone failed due to
a problem.
t Retry listing (page 41).
Error - Please select ‘initialize’ from the
Bluetooth settings menu.
A memory error has occurred.
t Initialize the Bluetooth setting (page 44).
Handsfree device is not available.
A cellular phone is not connected.
t Connect a cellular phone (page 36).
Hubs not supported.
USB hub is not supported on this unit.
Local Seek +/Local Seek –
The local seek mode is on during automatic tuning.
No device found.
No device is in the list of registered Bluetooth device.
t Perform pairing with a Bluetooth device (page 35).
No playable data.
The disc does not contain playable data.
No SensMe™ data on device.
The connected USB device does not contain data for
the SensMe™ function, or the data has been moved to
an improper location in the USB device.
68
Offset
There may be an internal malfunction.
t Check the connection. If the error indication
remains on in the display, consult your nearest
Sony dealer.
Output connection failure.
The connection of speakers/amplifiers is incorrect.
t See the supplied installation/connections manual to
check the connection.
Overcurrent Caution on USB
The USB device is overloaded.
t Disconnect the USB device, then change the source
by pressing (SOURCE/OFF).
t Indicates that the USB device is out of order, or an
unsupported device is connected.
Playback prohibited by region code.
The DVD playback is prohibited due to the different
region code.
Please push reset.
This unit or USB device cannot be operated due to a
problem.
t Press the reset button (page 14).
SensMe™ data Reading...
The unit is reading all data for the SensMe™ function
in the connected USB device.
t Wait until reading is complete. Depending on the
amount of data, etc., it may take time.
The connected USB device is not supported.
For details on the compatibility of your USB device,
visit the support site.
The SensMe™ data is corrupted.
The data for the SensMe™ function has a problem,
such as altered file name, information, etc.
USB device is not connected.
USB is selected as source without a USB device
connected. A USB device or a USB cable has been
disconnected during playback.
t Be sure to connect a USB device and USB cable.
USB Reading...
The unit is reading all file/album (folder) information
in the connected USB device.
t Wait until reading is complete and playback starts
automatically. Depending on the structure, it may
take time.
“
” or “
”
During reverse or fast-forward, you have reached the
beginning or the end of the disc and you cannot go any
further.
“ ”
The character cannot be displayed with the unit.
If these solutions do not help improve the situation,
consult your nearest Sony dealer.
If you take the unit to be repaired because of disc
playback trouble, bring the disc that was used at the
time the problem began.
Language code/area code list
Language code list
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
1027
1028
1032
1039
1044
1045
1051
1052
1053
1057
1059
1060
1061
1066
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali;
Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
1183
1186
1194
1196
1203
1209
1217
1226
1229
1233
1235
1239
1245
1248
1253
1254
1257
1261
1269
1283
1287
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1305
1307
1311
1313
1326
1327
1332
1334
1347
1349
1350
1352
1353
1356
1357
1358
1363
1365
1369
1376
1379
1393
1403
1408
1417
1428
1435
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
1503
1505
1506
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan)Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto;
Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
RhaetoRomance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
SerboCroatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
1507
1508
1509
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1521
1525
1527
1528
1529
1531
1532
1534
1535
1538
1539
1540
1543
1557
1564
1572
1581
1587
1613
1632
1665
1684
1697
1345
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian;
Lettish
Malagasy
1703
Not specified
1067
1070
1079
1093
1097
1103
1105
1109
1130
1142
1144
1145
1149
1150
1151
1157
1165
1166
1171
1174
1181
1436
1463
1481
1482
1483
1489
1491
1495
1498
1501
1502
Area code list
Code
Area
Code
Area
Code
Area
Code
Area
2044
2047
2046
2057
2070
2079
2090
2092
2115
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
Chile
China
Denmark
2165
2174
2109
2248
2238
2254
2276
2304
2363
Finland
France
Germany
India
Indonesia
Italy
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
2362
2376
2390
2379
2427
2424
2436
2489
2501
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Philippines
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
2149
2499
2086
2528
2184
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
United
Kingdom
69
Index
A
D
I
AAC 9, 60
Angle (Angle) 19
Area code 69
Audio channel (Stereo) 23
Audio DRC (Audio DRC) 54
Audio format (Audio) 23
Audio streaming 43
Auto Off (Auto OFF) 50
Automatic answer
(Auto Answer) 44
Auxiliary equipment 57
Auxiliary level (Level) 57
Auxiliary settings (AUX1
Input, AUX2 Input) 51, 58
Demonstration (Demo) 53
Dimmer level
(Dimmer Level) 50
Dimmer setting (Dimmer) 50
Discs 9
Display language
(Language) 14, 50
DivX Video-on-Demand
56, 61
DivX® 9, 60
Dolby D level
(Dolby D Level) 23
Dolby Digital 23
DVD audio language (Audio,
DVD Audio Language) 23, 54
DVD control menu
(DVD Control) 19
DVD direct search play
(DVD Direct Search) 25, 54
DVD menu 17
DVD menu language
(DVD Menu Language) 54
DVD playlist play
(DVD Playlist Play) 54
DVD’s top menu
(Top Menu) 17, 19
Dynamic Range Control
(DRC) 54
Image rotate (Image Turn) 19
Initial settings
(Initial Setting) 14
Intelligent Time Alignment
45, 46
iPod 31, 61
B
Background screen
(Screen Select) 48
Balance
(Balance/Fader) 45, 52
Best Tuning Memory
(BTM) 21
Bluetooth 34
Bluetooth setting initialization
(Initialize) 44
Bluetooth settings 43
Bluetooth signal
(Signal) 36, 44
Button illumination
(Key Illumination) 51
C
Card remote commander
12, 14, 62
Center Speaker Organizer
(CSO) 46, 52
Clock display (Clock) 11, 53
Clock setting
(Clock Adjust) 57
Clock Time (CT) 21, 22, 50
Crossover filter
(Crossover Filter) 53
E
Echo Canceller/Noise
Canceller Mode
(EC/NC Mode) 44
EQ7 44, 52
JPEG 9, 60
L
Language code 69
List up (List) 33
Listening position
(Listening Position) 45, 52
Local seek mode (Local) 16
Low Pass Filter (LPF) 53
M
Microphone gain
(MIC Gain) 39, 44
Monaural mode (Mono) 16
Monitor angle
(Monitor Angle) 47
Monitor type
(Monitor Type) 55
MP3 9, 60
MPEG-4 9, 61
Multi Border DVD 60
Multi channel output
(Multi Ch Output) 54
Multi Session CD 60
Multi-disc resume playback
(Multi Disc Resume) 55
F
Fader (Balance/Fader) 45, 52
Formats 9
Fuse 62
N
G
O
General settings (General) 50
Gesture Command 34
Operation sound (Beep) 50
Output color system
(Output Color System) 50
H
Handsfree calling 37
High Pass Filter (HPF) 53
70
J
No signal (No Signal) 51
NTSC 50
P
S
PAL 50
Parental control settings
(DVD Parental Control) 24, 54
Passenger control
(Passenger Control) 32
Picture EQ 48, 53
Play menu (Play Menu) 19
Playable discs 9
Playback control
(Video CD PBC) 22, 55
Playback settings (Visual) 54
Program Types (PTY) 21, 22
Screen aspect ratio
(Aspect) 49, 53
Screen settings (Screen) 53
Security function
(Security Control) 57
SensMe™ 27
Shuffle play
(Shuffle) 24, 26, 32
Slide show interval
(JPEG Slide Show) 55
Slow-motion play 19
Sound settings (Sound) 52
Speaker volume
(4.1ch Speaker Level) 47
Subtitle language
(Subtitle, DVD Subtitle
Language) 19, 54
Subwoofer position 45
Subwoofer setting
(Subwoofer) 14, 52
Subwoofer volume
(Balance/Fader) 45, 52
R
Radio Data System (RDS) 21
Rear Bass Enhancer
(RBE) 46, 53
Rear view camera 58
Rear view camera input
(Camera Input) 51
Rear view camera settings
(Rear View Camera Setting)
58
Receive menu
(Receive Menu) 16
Repeat play
(Repeat) 24, 26, 32
Reset 14
Resume play 19
Ring tone (Ringtone) 44
Rotary commander
(Rotary Commander) 51
T
Touch panel calibration
(Touch Panel Adjust) 47
U
USB device 26
USB resume playback
(USB Resume) 55
V
Volume 10
W
WMA 9, 60
Z
ZAPPIN beep sound
(ZAPPIN Tone) 55
ZAPPIN playback time
(ZAPPIN Time) 55
ZAPPIN™ 33
71
‫ص‬
‫م‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪50 (Beep‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﺻﻔري ‪ZAPPIN) ZAPPIN‬‬
‫‪55 (Tone‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫‪46 ,45‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺠﻬري اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫)‪53 ،46 (RBE‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﲇ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ )‪50 (Dimmer‬‬
‫)‪53 (Crossover Filter‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﺠﻬري )‪53 (HPF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺠﻬري )‪53 (LPF‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ‪Dolby D‬‬
‫)‪23 (Dolby D Level‬‬
‫ض‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪57 (Clock Adjust‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(Subwoofer‬‬
‫‪52 ،14‬‬
‫ع‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬
‫)‪50 (Dimmer Level‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ‪10‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض إﻳﻀﺎﺣﻲ )‪53 (Demo‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪54 ،25 (DVD Direct Search‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪53 ،11 (Clock‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ )‪33 (List‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫‪61 ،56‬‬
‫)‪52 ،45 (Balance/Fader‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪Touch‬‬
‫‪47 (Panel Adjust‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪52 ،46 (CSO‬‬
‫ف‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي )‪(Level‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪47 (4.1ch Speaker Level‬‬
‫ق‬
‫ن‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﱃ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫)‪53 ،49 (Aspect‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم أﻟﻮان اﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎت‬
‫)‪16 (Receive Menu‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪19 (DVD Control‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪19 (Play Menu‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪17 DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺤﺪود ‪60‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﻣﻀﻐﻮط ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪60‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت )‪23 (Stereo‬‬
‫)‪50 (Output Color System‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪21 (RDS‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني )‪44 (Ringtone‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪55 (Monitor Type‬‬
‫و‬
‫ك‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪58‬‬
‫)‪52 ،45 (Listening Position‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺤﲇ )‪16 (Local‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ﻏري اﺳﱰﻳﻮ )‪16 (Mono‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪45‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬
‫)‪44 ،39 (MIC Gain‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ إﺷﺎرة )‪51 (No Signal‬‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪Subtitle, DVD Subtitle‬‬
‫‪54 ،19 (Language‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫)‪50 ،14 (Language‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪DVD (Audio, DVD‬‬
‫‪54 ،23 (Audio Language‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪54 (DVD Menu Language‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫)‪57 (Security Control‬‬
‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪50 ،22 ،21 (CT‬‬
‫وﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ZAPPIN) ZAPPIN‬‬
‫‪55 (Time‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫إ‬
‫ب‬
‫‪60 ،9 AAC‬‬
‫إﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪34 Bluetooth‬‬
‫)‪44 (Auto Answer‬‬
‫إﺷﺎرة ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫)‪44 ،36 (Signal‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪62 ,14 ,12‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪60 ،9 ®DivX‬‬
‫‪23 Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪52 ،44 EQ7‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪61 ،31 iPod‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪60 ،9 JPEG‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪60 ،9 MP3‬‬
‫‪61 ،9 MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪50 NTSC‬‬
‫إﺿﺎءة اﻟﺰر‬
‫)‪51 (Key Illumination‬‬
‫إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪14‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ‪43 Bluetooth‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪54 (Visual‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‬
‫)‪(AUX1 Input, AUX2 Input‬‬
‫‪58 ،51‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪53 (Screen‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت )‪52 (Sound‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ )‪DVD‬‬
‫‪54 ،24 (Parental Control‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪50 (General‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )‪Rear‬‬
‫‪58 (View Camera Setting‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﺪى‪/‬وﺿﻊ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﺪى‬
‫)‪44 (EC/NC Mode‬‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(Auto OFF‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ا‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪19‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫)‪55 (USB Resume‬‬
‫‪50 PAL‬‬
‫‪53 ،48 Picture EQ‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻣﺘﻌﺪد )‪Multi‬‬
‫‪55 (Disc Resume‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪27 SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪60 ،9 WMA‬‬
‫)‪14 (Initial Setting‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ‪37‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪55 ،22 (Video CD PBC‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت ‪9‬‬
‫اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ )‪19 (Angle‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر اﻟﺪوار‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫)‪51 (Rotary Commander‬‬
‫‪33 ZAPPINTM‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‬
‫أ‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪9‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪9‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ )‪22 ،21 (PTY‬‬
‫)‪55 (JPEG Slide Show‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪19 ،17 (Top Menu‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮاري )‪52 ،45 (Balance/Fader‬‬
‫اﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫)‪54 (Multi Ch Output‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ ‪62‬‬
‫ت‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب )‪Passenger‬‬
‫‪32 (Control‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك )‪54 (DRC‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك ﻟﻠﺼﻮت )‪Audio‬‬
‫‪54 (DRC‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻹﺷﺎرة ‪34‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة )‪19 (Image Turn‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪19‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‬
‫)‪32 ،26 ،24 (Shuffle‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪54 (DVD Playlist Play‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‬
‫)‪32 ،26 ،24 (Repeat‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪23 (Audio‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪Bluetooth (Initialize‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺗﻮازن )‪52 ،45 (Balance/Fader‬‬
‫ج‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪26 USB‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺛﺎﻧﻮي ‪57‬‬
‫د‬
‫دﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )‪Camera‬‬
‫‪51 (Input‬‬
‫ذ‬
‫ذاﻛﺮة أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪21 (BTM‬‬
‫ر‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪69‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪69‬‬
‫ز‬
‫زاوﻳﺔ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫)‪47 (Monitor Angle‬‬
‫ش‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪48 (Screen Select‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪/‬رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻫﺠﺎء اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﻴﺎر ‪.1988(E/F) :ISO 639‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪1027‬‬
‫‪1028‬‬
‫‪1032‬‬
‫‪1039‬‬
‫‪1044‬‬
‫‪1045‬‬
‫‪1051‬‬
‫‪1052‬‬
‫‪1053‬‬
‫‪1057‬‬
‫‪1059‬‬
‫‪1060‬‬
‫‪1061‬‬
‫‪1066‬‬
‫‪1067‬‬
‫‪1070‬‬
‫‪1079‬‬
‫‪1093‬‬
‫‪1097‬‬
‫‪1103‬‬
‫‪1105‬‬
‫‪1109‬‬
‫‪1130‬‬
‫‪1142‬‬
‫‪1144‬‬
‫‪1145‬‬
‫‪1149‬‬
‫‪1150‬‬
‫‪1151‬‬
‫‪1157‬‬
‫‪1165‬‬
‫‪1166‬‬
‫‪1171‬‬
‫‪1174‬‬
‫‪1181‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫أﻓﺎر‬
‫اﻷﺑﺨﺎزﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫أميﺎرا‬
‫اﻷذرﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺎﺷﻜريﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﻼروﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﻬﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺴﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ;‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺠﻼ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺒﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱪﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﻼﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮرﺳﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺪمنﺎرﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻬﻮﺗﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻹﺳﱪاﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫اﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻹﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎروﻳﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪1183‬‬
‫‪1186‬‬
‫‪1194‬‬
‫‪1196‬‬
‫‪1203‬‬
‫‪1209‬‬
‫‪1217‬‬
‫‪1226‬‬
‫‪1229‬‬
‫‪1233‬‬
‫‪1235‬‬
‫‪1239‬‬
‫‪1245‬‬
‫‪1248‬‬
‫‪1253‬‬
‫‪1254‬‬
‫‪1257‬‬
‫‪1261‬‬
‫‪1269‬‬
‫‪1283‬‬
‫‪1287‬‬
‫‪1297‬‬
‫‪1298‬‬
‫‪1299‬‬
‫‪1300‬‬
‫‪1301‬‬
‫‪1305‬‬
‫‪1307‬‬
‫‪1311‬‬
‫‪1313‬‬
‫‪1326‬‬
‫‪1327‬‬
‫‪1332‬‬
‫‪1334‬‬
‫‪1345‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻐﻠﻴﺸﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻮراﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻐﻮﺟﻮراﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎوﺳﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺮواﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺠﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻷرﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﱰﻟﻮﻧﺠﻮاﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻧﱰﻟﻴﻨﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫إﻳﻨﻮﺑﻴﺎك‬
‫اﻹﻧﺪوﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻵﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﱪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻮرﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎزاﺧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺮﻳﻨﻼﻧﺪﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﻧﺎدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮرﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺸﻤريﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺮدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﻮاﻻ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺛﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ؛‬
‫اﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺪﻏﺸﻘﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪1347‬‬
‫‪1349‬‬
‫‪1350‬‬
‫‪1352‬‬
‫‪1353‬‬
‫‪1356‬‬
‫‪1357‬‬
‫‪1358‬‬
‫‪1363‬‬
‫‪1365‬‬
‫‪1369‬‬
‫‪1376‬‬
‫‪1379‬‬
‫‪1393‬‬
‫‪1403‬‬
‫‪1408‬‬
‫‪1417‬‬
‫‪1428‬‬
‫‪1435‬‬
‫اﳌﺎورﻳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻘﺪوﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻼﻳﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮﻟﺪوﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺎراﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻼوﻳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺎﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻮرﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎورو‬
‫اﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟرنوﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷوﻛﺴﻴﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷوروﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷورﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ؛‬
‫اﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫اﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮا‬
‫راﻳﺘﻮ‪-‬‬
‫روﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻮروﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮوﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮوﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻴﻨﻴﺎراوﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻧﺴﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﴏب‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺮواﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﻼﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪1507‬‬
‫‪1508‬‬
‫‪1509‬‬
‫‪1511‬‬
‫‪1512‬‬
‫‪1513‬‬
‫‪1514‬‬
‫‪1515‬‬
‫‪1516‬‬
‫‪1517‬‬
‫‪1521‬‬
‫‪1525‬‬
‫‪1527‬‬
‫‪1528‬‬
‫‪1529‬‬
‫‪1531‬‬
‫‪1532‬‬
‫‪1534‬‬
‫‪1535‬‬
‫‪1538‬‬
‫‪1539‬‬
‫‪1540‬‬
‫‪1543‬‬
‫‪1557‬‬
‫‪1564‬‬
‫‪1572‬‬
‫‪1581‬‬
‫‪1587‬‬
‫‪1613‬‬
‫‪1632‬‬
‫‪1665‬‬
‫‪1684‬‬
‫‪1697‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻣﻮوﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻮﻧﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﴫﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﻮايت‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﻮﺛﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮداﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮاﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻮ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﺟﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺠﺮﻳﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛامﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻏﻠﻮغ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺘﺴﻮاﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻮﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺘﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮي‬
‫اﻷوﻛﺮاﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷوردو‬
‫اﻷوزﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺑﻮك‬
‫اﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫زوﺳﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻮروﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰوﻟﻮ‬
‫‪1436‬‬
‫‪1463‬‬
‫‪1481‬‬
‫‪1482‬‬
‫‪1483‬‬
‫‪1489‬‬
‫‪1491‬‬
‫‪1495‬‬
‫‪1498‬‬
‫‪1501‬‬
‫‪1502‬‬
‫‪1503‬‬
‫‪1505‬‬
‫‪1506‬‬
‫‪1703‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺤﺪدة‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪2044‬‬
‫‪2047‬‬
‫‪2046‬‬
‫‪2057‬‬
‫‪2070‬‬
‫‪2079‬‬
‫‪2090‬‬
‫‪2092‬‬
‫‪2115‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻷرﺟﻨﺘني‬
‫أﺳﱰاﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫اﻟﱪازﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪا‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﲇ‬
‫اﻟﺼني‬
‫اﻟﺪامنﺮك‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪2165‬‬
‫‪2174‬‬
‫‪2109‬‬
‫‪2248‬‬
‫‪2238‬‬
‫‪2254‬‬
‫‪2276‬‬
‫‪2304‬‬
‫‪2363‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪا‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫أﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻬﻨﺪ‬
‫إﻧﺪوﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫إﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎن‬
‫ﻛﻮرﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪2362‬‬
‫‪2376‬‬
‫‪2390‬‬
‫‪2379‬‬
‫‪2427‬‬
‫‪2424‬‬
‫‪2436‬‬
‫‪2489‬‬
‫‪2501‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪا‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮزﻳﻠﻨﺪا‬
‫اﻟرنوﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎن‬
‫اﻟﻔﻠﺒني‬
‫اﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎل‬
‫روﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮرة‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪2149‬‬
‫‪2499‬‬
‫‪2086‬‬
‫‪2528‬‬
‫‪2184‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫إﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﴪا‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫اﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪة‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪.Cannot read disc. Disc may be corrupted‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Error‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﺘﺴﺦ أو ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﻘﺮص أو إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻓﺎرغ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أدﺧﻞ ً‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أدﺧﻞ ً‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪Disc Reading...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻠﻒ‪/‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ( اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻘﺮاءة وﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪ .‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ذﻟﻚ أﻛرث ﻣﻦ دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Error‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻣﺤﺘﻮى دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫• ﻓﺸﻞ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أﻋﺪ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫• ﻓﺸﻞ ﴎد دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أﻋﺪ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﴎد اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫‪Error - Please select 'initialize' from the‬‬
‫‪.Bluetooth settings menu‬‬
‫ﺣﺪث ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪) Bluetooth‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪.Handsfree device is not available‬‬
‫مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(36‬‬
‫‪.Hubs not supported‬‬
‫ﻣﻮزع ‪ USB‬ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮم ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫– ‪Local Seek +/Local Seek‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺤﲇ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.No device found‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻹﻗﺮان ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) Bluetooth‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(35‬‬
‫‪.No playable data‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﲆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.No SensMe™ data on device‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ™‪ SensMe‬أو‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻏري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫‪Offset‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك ﻋﻄﻞ داﺧﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﺮض ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬اﻷﻗﺮب إﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Output connection failure‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪/‬ﻣﻀﺨامت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Overcurrent Caution on USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ زاﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﺼﺪر ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫)‪.(SOURCE/OFF‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أو ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮم‪.‬‬
‫‪.Playback prohibited by region code‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﺧﺘﻼف رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Please push reset‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪SensMe™ data Reading...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ™‪SensMe‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻘﺮاءة‪ .‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق وﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.The connected USB device is not supported‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.The SensMe™ data is corrupted‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ™‪ ،SensMe‬ﻛﺘﻐﻴري اﺳﻢ‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ أو اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.USB device is not connected‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ USB‬أو ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬وﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪USB Reading...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻘﺮاءة ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻠﻒ‪/‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ( اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻘﺮاءة وﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪ .‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‬
‫" أو "‬
‫"‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ أو اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص أو ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ وﻻ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻘﺪم أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫"‬
‫"‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﻠﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﺤﺴني اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪Sony‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮب إﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺬ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻀﺎر اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ﻛﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ وﻗﺖ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬر اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ واﻹﻗﺮان اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧني‪.‬‬
‫• ارﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎل ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Ringtone‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "Default‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ارﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮل اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ أن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ أو ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى "‪) "MIC Gain‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(39‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪث ﺻﺪى أو ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﰲ اﳌﺤﺎدﺛﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "EC/NC Mode‬ﻋﲆ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "EC/NC Mode‬ﻋﲆ "‪ "Mode 1‬أو "‪"Mode 2‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﻼف ﺻﻮت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﺎﺧﺒ ًﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺎول ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة وﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ أو ﻣﺎ‬
‫إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ اﻟﻬﻮاء‬
‫ﺻﺎﺧ ًﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ اﻟﻬﻮاء‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮدة ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ردﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻮدة ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻇﺮوف اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺣﺮك اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎن ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺤﺴني إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻮي إذا ﻛﺎن اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ردﻳﺌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ أو ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺮوق ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑني ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪) Bluetooth‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑني اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﺟﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﰲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫اﻹﺷﺎرة‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰع اﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬أو أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى ﺗﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫وﻻ ﻳﺸري ذﻟﻚ إﱃ وﺟﻮد ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ أن ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.AVRCP‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ دﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﺤﻦ ﺑﺼﺪدﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺪﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﰲ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﲆ إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﲆ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ دون ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﲆ ﺑﺪء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Answer‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ "‪ "Short‬أو "‪"Long‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ اﻹﻗﺮان ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﳌﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺣﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮان ﻗﺼ ًريا‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎول إﻛامل اﻹﻗﺮان ﰲ ﺣﺪود اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﱪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﺮور ﻣﻦ رﻗﻢ‬
‫واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﳌﺪة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫واﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺑﺪون‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻳﺪي‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‬
‫ﻋﲆ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎت ﻋﺮض‪/‬رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth device is not found‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪.Busy now… Please try again‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎت وأﻋﺪ اﳌﺤﺎوﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Cannot read‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺸﻜﻼت‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ أو ﻣﻌﻄﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬ﻳﺘﺸﻮه اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬واﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﻌﻴﺐ أو ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺰاوﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 45‬درﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺰء ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﻴﺲ ‪ 32‬أو ‪ 44.1‬أو ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ WMA‬ﻟﻴﺲ ‪ 32‬أو ‪ 44.1‬أو ‪48‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل أﺧﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ AAC‬ﻟﻴﺲ ‪ 44.1‬أو ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﻟﺨﺎص مبﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 48‬إﱃ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﻟﺨﺎص مبﻠﻒ ‪ WMA‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 64‬إﱃ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﻟﺨﺎص مبﻠﻒ ‪ AAC‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 40‬إﱃ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬اﻹرﺟﺎع‪/‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺨﺮج ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪًا )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(23‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ واﺟﻬﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺎرة ﺑﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت(‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﳌﺘﻮاري "‪ "Fader‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺳامﻋﺘني‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮم )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.(DTS‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺸﻮش‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ وﺟﻮد اﻷﺳﻼك واﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼت ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص آﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻨﻮة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻠﻮب أو ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﻌﻴﺐ أو ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻏري ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻏري ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﺴﺒﺐ رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻘﺮص )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻘﺮص وإﺻﺪار اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘني ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59 ،9‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﳌﻌﺎﻳري ‪ ISO 9660 level 1‬أو ‪level 2‬‬
‫أو ‪ Joliet‬أو ‪ Romeo‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ )ﻗﺮص اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻀﻐﻮط(‬
‫أو ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) UDF Bridge‬ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت( )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﺤﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/‬‬
‫‪.DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة(‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻏريﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺮص ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺷﺠﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺮص ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﰲ ﺟﻠﺴﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪/‬ﺣﺪود ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫– اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ميﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض أو اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف ﻋﺮض ﻋﺪة أﻗﺮاص‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎف أو‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ أو ﺗﻜﺮار‪/‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪/‬اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ زر اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت أو ﺗﺮاﺟﻢ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫اﻟﻠﻐﺎت أو زواﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴري ﻗﻴﻮد ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ أزرار اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "5776‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(24‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ ﻋﱪ ﻣﻮزع ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻋﱪ ﻣﻮزع ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ‪.‬‬
‫أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻋﺮض ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺒرية اﻟﺤﺠﻢ أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ذات ﺑﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺠﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض أوﻻً ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﱄ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Signal‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Discoverable‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "Show‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ واﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﻌﺘﻢ ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ‬
‫)‪.(SOURCE/OFF‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﳌﺲ "‪ "M.OFF‬ﻛام ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﳌﺲ أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• اﳌﺲ ﺟﺰ ًءا واﺣﺪًا ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ اﳌﺮة‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﳌﺲ ﺟﺰءﻳﻦ أو أﻛرث ﰲ‬
‫آن واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺑﺪون إﺿﺎءة(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(11‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻏري اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﺮﻣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AUX‬ﻋﲆ أﻧﻪ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ إﻋﺪادات دﺧﻞ ‪ AUX‬ﻋﲆ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "AUX1 Input"/"AUX2 Input‬ﻋﲆ "‪"Video‬‬
‫أو "‪) "Audio‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(58‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ إﻋﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ )أزرق( أو ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﳌﻠﺤﻖ )أﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳌﻌﺰز‬
‫ﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻣﺰودة ﺑﻬﻮايئ ‪FM/AM‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰﺟﺎج اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮايئ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ ﻷﻋﲆ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻏري ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﱰدد اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺒﺚ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏري ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺤﲇ ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻛﺜ ًريا‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Local‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Mono‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫• إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺒﺚ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﻴﺪوﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﺑﺚ ‪ ،FM‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ "‪."Stereo‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ مبﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﱰدد ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺒﺚ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪًا‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Mono‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳامع ﺑﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ FM‬اﻻﺳﺘريﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮت أﺣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل أﺣﺎدي اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Mono‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "OFF‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض ‪) PTY‬ﻧﻮع اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ( "‪."None‬‬
‫• اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ‪.RDS‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﻘﺒﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪.RDS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺪد اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻧﻮع اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ واﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻘﺮص ﻣﻌﻴﺐ أو ﻣﺘﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺰاوﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 45‬درﺟﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺰء ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫• مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف )اﻟﻀﻮء اﻷﺧﴬ( ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻓﺮاﻣﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ أو مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﺮاﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻼءم اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺼﺪر‪/‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻏري اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد دﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻏري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان ﻋﲆ "‪ "PAL‬أو "‪ "NTSC‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻛﺎﻣريا‬
‫اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺣﻘﻮق اﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Microsoft Corporation‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أو‬
‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﺎرج ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ دون اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ Microsoft‬أو ﴍﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ واﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري دون اﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺜﺒﻄﺎت اﻟﻠﻬﺐ اﳌﻬﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻮاﺋﺢ اﻷﺳﻼك‬
‫اﳌﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺜﺒﻄﺎت اﻟﻠﻬﺐ اﳌﻬﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ وﺳﺎﺋﺪ اﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮرق‪.‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻧﴩ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ً ALL‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺣﺎوﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أي ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫"‪ ."Playback prohibited by region code‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺮص ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ رﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ وإن ﻛﺎن‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺤﻈﻮ ًرا مبﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻴﻮد اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪) CPU‬وﺣﺪة اﳌﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ(‪) RAM/‬ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺻﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ(‬
‫– اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ‪IBM PC/AT‬‬
‫– وﺣﺪة اﳌﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪ :(CPU‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪Intel Pentium‬‬
‫‪ III‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 450‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ أو أﻋﲆ‬
‫– ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺻﻮل اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ )‪ 256 : (RAM‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ أو أﻛرث‬
‫)ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪ 512 ،(Windows XP‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ أو أﻛرث )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪ Windows Vista‬أو اﻹﺻﺪار اﻷﺣﺪث(‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺮك اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Windows XP، Windows Vista، Windows 7‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل اﻹﺻﺪارات اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫أﻟﻮان ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ 16‬ﺑﺖ( أو أﻛرث‪ 600 × 800 ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أو أﻛرث‬
‫أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع آﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼف ‪ ،IBM‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫– أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫– أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫– اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎت‬
‫– اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮي‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﻷﺧﻄﺎء وإﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪك ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻼج اﳌﺸﻜﻼت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﺟﻬﻚ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ اﻟﻮاردة أدﻧﺎه‪ ،‬اﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ وإﺟﺮاءات‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓريﺟﻰ زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪gL,`NXse‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/‬‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أو اﳌﺼﻨﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﺧﺘﻔﺎء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ متﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻣﻨﺎوﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت ﻧﺸﻂ اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻛام أﻧﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﳌﺨﺰﻧني‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪث ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ أﻟﻮان‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‪ 7.0 :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ :‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ TFT‬اﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪد وﺣﺪات اﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ 1,152,000 :‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪PAL/NTSC/SECAM/PAL-M‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 87.5‬إﱃ ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻋﻨﺪ درﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ ‪50‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 150 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪ 10 :‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺘﻮ وات‬
‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ 75 :‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 400‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ 70 :‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺻﻮت أﺣﺎدي(‬
‫اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ 40 :‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﱰدد‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 20‬إﱃ ‪ 15,000‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 531‬إﱃ ‪ 1,602‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻋﻨﺪ درﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 25 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ 26 :‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ 120 :‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﱰدد‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬إﱃ ‪ 20,000‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎوت واﻟﺨﻔﻘﺎن‪ :‬أدىن ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎس‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ‪0.01% :‬‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫اﻟﻮاﺟﻬﺔ‪) USB :‬ﴎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر‪ 500 :‬ﻣﻠﲇ أﻣﺒري‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪:‬‬
‫إﺻﺪار ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻴﺎﳼ ‪EDR + 2.0‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﺮج‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) 2‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ‬
‫‪ +4‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﲇ واط(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر*‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﱰدد‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎق ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 2.4000‬إﱃ ‪ 2.4835‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫أﺳﻠﻮب اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪FHSS :‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ*‪:2‬‬
‫‪) A2DP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻘﺪم(‬
‫‪) AVRCP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪1.3‬‬
‫‪) HFP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ( ‪1.5‬‬
‫‪) PBAP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫‪) OPP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ(‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻟﻔﻌﲇ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﻌﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻌﻮاﺋﻖ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﺑني اﻷﺟﻬﺰة واﳌﺠﺎﻻت اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻓﺮن اﳌﻴﻜﺮووﻳﻒ واﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
‫اﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ وﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل وأداء اﻟﻬﻮايئ وﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸري ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬إﱃ اﻟﻐﺮض ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑني اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‬
‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺨﺮج‪ :‬أﻃﺮاف ﺧﺮج اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎوﻗﺔ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬إﱃ ‪ 8‬أوم‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﺨﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ 52 :‬واط × ‪) 4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺨﺮج‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫أﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت )أﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮج ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﺘﻨﺎوب ﰲ اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‬
‫أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻹﺿﺎءة‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ دﺧﻞ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻬﻮايئ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻓﺮاﻣﻞ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻌﻜﴘ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣريا‬
‫أﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ ﺻﻮت ‪AUX‬‬
‫أﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ دﺧﻞ إﺷﺎرة ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺎرة ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﺄرﻳﺾ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )أرﴈ((‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‪ 189 × 100 × 178 :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ )اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬اﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫أﺑﻌﺎد اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ 164 × 111 × 182 :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﻮزن‪ 2.5 :‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‬
‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪RM-X170 :‬‬
‫أﺟﺰاء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ واﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻷﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ دﺧﻞ ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪AUX‬‬
‫اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪XA-MC10 :‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط )ﻗﺮص اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ(‬
‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻳﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪XVM-B62 :‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪RC-200IPV : iPod‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪XA-R800C :‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ أﻋﻼه‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ .‬اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ واﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري دون إﺷﻌﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ واﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﺼﻮيت ‪ MPEG Layer-3‬وﺑﺮاءات‬
‫اﻻﺧﱰاع ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺘﻲ ‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬و ‪.Thomson‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫• إﻧﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ أﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﴪب اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أﺛﻨﺎء اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• وﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺿامن اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫– ﻳﻠﺰم أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺰود ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺤﺪد ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪،Bluetooth SIG‬‬
‫وﻣﺼ ّﺪ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺬﻛﻮر أﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰات أو اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫– أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻳﺪي‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز أو ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﺳﺎءة اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬا‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ أو ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﻬﺎ أو اﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ اﻟﻨﺎر‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﺬﻛﻮر ﻋﲆ اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ اﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺣﱰق اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﺳﺘﺒﺪل اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ .‬إذا اﺣﱰق‬
‫اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪال‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك ﻋﻄﻞ داﺧﲇ‪ .‬وﰲ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬اﻷﻗﺮب إﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ )‪ 10‬أﻣﺒري(‬
‫أﺧﺮى‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮوف ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ واﳌﻜﺎن اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﺷﻌﺮت ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﻋﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻔﻮر‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت أﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬اﻷﻗﺮب إﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪ 1‬أدﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﰲ آن واﺣﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺮارﻫام ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬام‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎؤﻻت أو ﻣﺸﻜﻼت ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة مل ﻳﺘﻨﺎوﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬اﻷﻗﺮب ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮم اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﰲ ﻇﻞ اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﳌﺪة ﺳﻨﺔ واﺣﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أﻗﴫ‪ ،‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮوف اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻌﻒ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻄﺎق ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ أﻗﴫ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮم ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮاز ‪ .CR2025‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻮي اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أي ﻧﻮع آﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻋﲆ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ أو اﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎر‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻄﺎف ﻣﺘﺠﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪاﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻮﺟﺐ ‪ +‬ﻷﻋﲆ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ ﺧﺎرج ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮم‬
‫• أﺑﻖ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮم ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺑﺘﻼع اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﴩ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻔﻮر‪.‬‬
‫• اﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀامن اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ متﺴﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ مبﻠﻘﺎط ﻣﻌﺪين‪ ،‬وإﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺪث داﺋﺮة ﻗﴫ‪.‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺣﻮل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻫﺬا ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ .(VOD‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء رﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻗﺴﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﱃ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻛامل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ واﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ اﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬؟‬
‫• متﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺼرية اﳌﺪى‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ متﻜني اﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﺑني اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي وﺳامﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎق ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮاﱄ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪ .‬وﻳﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎزﻳﻦ‬
‫أﻣ ًﺮا ﺷﺎﺋ ًﻌﺎ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻜﻮن ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﴬوري ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ أن ﺗﻮاﺟﻪ‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ ،‬ﻛام ﻫﻮ اﻟﺤﺎل ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺮاء‪ .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ أو اﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎ ًرا ﻋﺎﳌ ًﻴﺎ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﻣﻼﻳني اﻟﴩﻛﺎت ﺣﻮل‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎمل ﺑﺄﴎه وﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﴩﻛﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻌﺎمل‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MPEG-4‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺿامن ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MPEG-4‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ‪ 7 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ‪ USB FS، 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD، 7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪل اﻹﻃﺎرات‪ 30 :‬إﻃﺎ ًرا ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ 480 × 720 :‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ‬
‫• اﻟﺼﻮت‪ 320 :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (AAC-LC‬ﻛﺤﺪ أﻗﴡ‬
‫• اﻣﺘﺪاد اﳌﻠﻒ‪.mp4 :‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮز ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ iPod‬ﺣﺘﻰ أﺣﺪث ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬
‫ُﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫– ‪) iPod touch‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﺎين(‬
‫– ‪) iPod touch‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻷول(‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪iPod classic‬‬
‫‪ iPod‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‬
‫‪) iPod nano‬اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز(‬
‫‪) iPod nano‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ(‬
‫‪) iPod nano‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ(‬
‫‪) iPod nano‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﺎين(‬
‫‪) iPod nano‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻷول(*‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPhone‬‬
‫– ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPhone‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ )‪(3G‬‬
‫– ‪iPhone 3GS‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) iPod nano‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷول( أو ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬اﳌﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪ُ ) "Made for iPod‬ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ (iPod‬أﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ وﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ إﻟﻜﱰوين ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻢ اﻋﺘامده ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳌﻄﻮر ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎء مبﻌﺎﻳري اﻷداء اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Apple‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪) "Works with iPhone‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ (iPhone‬أﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ إﻟﻜﱰوين ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ وﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ اﻋﺘامده ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳌﻄﻮر ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎء مبﻌﺎﻳري‬
‫‪iPhone‬‬
‫ً‬
‫اﻷداء اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Apple‬‬
‫• ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Apple‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أو ﺗﻮاﻓﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ واﳌﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﺗﺼﺎل ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎق ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻻﺗﺼﺎل وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮاﺋﻖ‬
‫)اﻷﺷﺨﺎص أو اﳌﻌﺎدن أو اﻟﺤﻮاﺋﻂ أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ( أو اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫– وﺟﻮد ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻛﺸﺨﺺ أو ﻣﻌﺪن أو ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺑني اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫– وﺟﻮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﱰدد ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أو ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻻﺳﻠيك أو ﻓﺮن ﻣﻴﻜﺮووﻳﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬واﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (IEEE802.11b/g‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﱰدد‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬
‫اﳌﻴﻜﺮووﻳﻒ وﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﺪﻫﻮر ﴎﻋﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل أو اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ أو‬
‫ﻋﺪم ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ مبﺎ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫– اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻋﲆ اﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎق ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬام ﻗﺪر اﻹﻣﻜﺎن‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺋﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﳌﻴﻜﺮووﻳﻒ اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬا أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وأﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻷﺧﺮى ﰲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدث‪.‬‬
‫– اﳌﻜﺎن اﻟﺬي ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﺎز ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎل أو ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ أو‬
‫ﻗﻄﺎر أو ﻃﺎﺋﺮة أو ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻷﺑﻮاب اﻵﻟﻴﺔ أو إﻧﺬار اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﻣﺎن اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓري اﺗﺼﺎل آﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻷﻣﺎن ﻛﺎﻓ ًﻴﺎ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪاد‪ .‬ﺗﻮخ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮص ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل إﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰم إﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) DVD-R/DVD-R DL‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬وﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ‪DVD+R/DVD+R DL‬‬
‫• ‪CD-R‬‬
‫• ‪CD-RW‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪون إﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ – DVD+RW‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎؤﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ‪ – VR‬ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰم اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪/‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺤﺪود‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪/‬‬
‫أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺤﺪود ﰲ اﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ أﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫إﻏﻼق اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ وإﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) CD-D‬ﻗﺮص ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮط( ﰲ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ‬
‫اﻷوﱃ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻛﻘﺮص ‪ CD-DA‬ﻛام ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ CD-DA‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ,‬ﺣﺘﻰ إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ آﺧﺮ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ (MP3 ،‬ﰲ ﺟﻠﺴﺎت أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ CD-DA‬ﻓﻴام دون اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ اﻷوﱃ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻛﻘﺮص ‪ DATA CD‬أو ‪DATA‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺟﻠﺴﺎت ﻗﺮص ‪.CD-DA‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪:MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻠﺴﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة(* )إذا ﻛﺎن ﻗﺮص ‪ CD-DA‬أو اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺠﻠﺴﺎت أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪ ,‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.33‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/‬‬
‫‪DivX®/MPEG-4‬‬
‫اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫)اﻷﻟﺒﻮم(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪MP3/WMA/‬‬
‫‪AAC/JPEG/‬‬
‫‪DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪MP3/WMA/AAC/‬‬
‫‪JPEG/DivX/‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫• ميﺜﻞ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ ،MP3‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺸري إﱃ ‪MPEG-1 Audio‬‬
‫‪ ،Layer-3‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ إﱃ ‪ 10/1‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﲇ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ID3‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0‬و‪ 1.1‬و‪ 2.2‬و‪ 2.3‬و‪2.4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MP3‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ID3‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 30/15‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ )اﻹﺻﺪار‬
‫‪ 1.0‬و‪ (1.1‬أو ‪ 126/63‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ )اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.2‬و‪ 2.3‬و‪.(2.4‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ "‪".mp3‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أو اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ذي )ﻣﻌﺪل‬
‫اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺘﻐري( ‪ ،VBR‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ دﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ذي ﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ ﻋﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪WMA‬‬
‫• ميﺜﻞ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ ،WMA‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺸري إﱃ ‪Windows Media‬‬
‫‪ ،Audio‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ إﱃ ‪ *22/1‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻷﺻﲇ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ WMA‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 63‬رﻣﺰًا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،WMA‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫"‪ "wma.‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أو اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬اﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ WMA‬ذي‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺘﻐري( ‪ ،VBR‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ دﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎت ذات ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺘﻐري ‪ 64‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺖ ﰲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻒ ‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ دﻋﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ WMA‬اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺪون ﻓﻘﺪان ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫– ﻣﺤﻤﻲ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪AAC‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ AAC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 126‬رﻣﺰًا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،AAC‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ "‪".m4a‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪JPEG‬‬
‫• ميﺜﻞ اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ ،JPEG‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺸري إﱃ ‪Joint Photographic‬‬
‫‪ ،Experts Group‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮرة‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10/1‬إﱃ ‪ 100/1‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﲇ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ اﳌﻠﻒ "‪"jpg.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻢ اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻒ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﳌﺤﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ دﻋﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ّ JPEG‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ®‪ DivX‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ رﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪DivX, Inc.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ وﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ اﻋﺘامد ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز رﺳﻤ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة اﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.divx.‬‬
‫‪ com‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت وأدوات اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت إﱃ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﱪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﻣﺮأب ﺗﺤﺖ أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻤﺪد اﻟﻬﻮايئ اﻵﱄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫واﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﳌﺪة ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ إﱃ أن ﺗﺠﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ متﺎ ًﻣﺎ؛ وإﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺮش اﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺣﻴﺚ ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة أو ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺪوث ﻋﻄﻞ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻏري واﺿﺤﺔ أو ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.(LCD‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﴚء ﺑﺨﻼف اﻷﺻﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬أو ﺗﺤﻄﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﺟﺎﻓﺔ وﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أو ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻄﻼء أو اﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺗﺠﺎر ًﻳﺎ أو اﻟﺮش اﳌﻀﺎد ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻄﺎق درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة ‪45 – 5‬‬
‫درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد أو ﺣﺎر‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻏري واﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة واﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ أن ﺗﺼري درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺰرﻗﺎء أو اﻟﺤﻤﺮاء أو اﻟﺨﴬاء اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ "ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ" وميﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺤﺪث ﻣﻊ‬
‫أي ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 99.99 %‬ﻣﻦ أﺟﺰاﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ أﻻ ﺗﴤء ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﺰاء )‪0.01 %‬‬
‫منﻮذﺟ ًﻴﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺎرض ذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة أو ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺤﺮارة ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ اﻟﻬﻮاء اﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ وﻻ ﺗﱰﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺮأب‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﻣﺴﺢ اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻘامش اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﺨﺎرج‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺤﺎﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ أو ﻣﺮﻗﻖ اﻟﻄﻼء أو اﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺗﺠﺎر ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﳌﻀﻐﻮط )‪ .(CD‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ وﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎت ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط )‪ ،(CD‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫– اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت أو ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎت أو اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ورﻗﺔ أو ﴍﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﺣﺪوث ﻋﻄﻞ أو ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆدي إﱃ ﺗﺪﻣري اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– اﻷﻗﺮاص ذات اﻷﺷﻜﺎل ﻏري اﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ إﱃ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫– اﻷﻗﺮاص ﻣﻘﺎس ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬و‪VCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬و‪ VCD‬ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﻲ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻟﻌﺮض ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪ DVD‬و‪ VCD‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺬي ﺻﻤﻤﻪ‬
‫اﳌﻨﺘﺠﻮن‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰات اﻟﻌﺮض ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة‪ً .‬‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬أو ‪.VCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل أﻗﺮاص ‪ DATA CD‬و‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ أﻗﺮاص ‪) DATA CD/DATA DVD‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﰲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ أو وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮوف اﻟﻘﺮص( ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰم إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻷﻗﺮاص )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DATA CD‬‬
‫– ﻣﻌﺎﻳري ‪ ISO 9660 level 1/level 2‬أو ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Joliet/‬‬
‫‪ Romeo‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫– اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫– ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) UDF Bridge‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ UDF‬و‪ ISO 9660‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫– ﺣﺪود ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻌﺪد‪:‬‬
‫– اﳌﺠﻠﺪات )اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت(‪) 256 :‬مبﺎ ﰲ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺠﺬر واﳌﺠﻠﺪات‬
‫اﻟﻔﺎرﻏﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫– اﳌﻠﻔﺎت )اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬أﻓﻼم اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( واﳌﺠﻠﺪات اﳌﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮص‪) 2,000 :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻌﺪد أﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2,000‬إذا‬
‫اﺣﺘﻮى اﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﺜري ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز(‪.‬‬
‫– اﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ اﳌﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻠﻒ‪ 64 :‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫)‪.(Joliet/Romeo‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﺼﻞ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ أو ﺻﻮت(‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪ .‬إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."General‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "AUX1 Input‬أو "‪AUX2‬‬
‫‪."Input‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Audio‬أو "‪."Video‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ دﺧﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Camera Input‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬
‫– اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﺮاﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪ .‬إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."General‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪Rear View Camera‬‬
‫‪."Setting‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪Marker‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪Mirror‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮف اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) CAMERA IN‬دﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣريا(‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎءة‬
‫اﳌﺼﺒﺎح اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )أو ﺿﺒﻂ ذراع اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) R‬رﺟﻮع‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إرﺟﺎع اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬راﻗﺐ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ وﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣريا ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ ,‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻋﺪم ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ دﺧﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣريا )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(51‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Line Edit‬‬
‫‪Turn off engine but keep the key in the “IGN” position.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Marker‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Marker‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Mirror‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺮآة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Line Edit‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪1 Edit‬‬
‫‪2 Edit‬‬
‫‪3 Edit‬‬
‫‪Turn off engine but keep the key in the “IGN” position.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "1 Edit‬أو "‪ "2 Edit‬أو "‪ "3 Edit‬اﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺨﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة اﻟﻄﻮل‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.B b‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﻮل‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.b B‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪ V‬أو ‪.v‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪ ,‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Reset‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ أﻣﺎن ﻹﺣﺒﺎط ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﴪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ ﻋﺪدًا ﻣﻜﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﻛﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻸﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫مبﺠﺮد ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة أﺧﺮى أو ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎزﻳﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻳني‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫اﳌﺤﻤﻮل واﻷﻟﻌﺎب وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﰲ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ AUX1 IN‬و‬
‫‪ AUX2 IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."AUX‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪ .‬إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."General‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Security Control‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺪاد رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹﻋﺎدة إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪AUX2‬‬
‫‪AUX1‬‬
‫‪Level 0‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Clear‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "AUX1‬أو "‪ "AUX2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺤﻤﻮل ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﺪ إﻋﺎدة‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة أﺧﺮى أو ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ .‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 2‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ ،"Unlocked‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ إﺷﺎرة ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪ .‬إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."General‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Clock Adjust‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "AM‬أو "‪."PM‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ واﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،8:30‬اﳌﺲ "‪."0830‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Clear‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻋﲆ "‪"AUX1‬‬
‫و"‪."AUX2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."AUX‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺤﻤﻮل مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامع اﳌﻌﺘﺎد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ –‪ +/‬ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺑﻊ "‪ "Level‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني ‪ –8‬و ‪.+18‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪DivX VOD Registration‬‬
‫‪Code‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫‪Done‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬
‫‪DivX VOD Deactivate‬‬
‫‪Code‬‬
‫‪Done‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‪ .‬وﰲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪Monitor Type‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫‪(z) 16:9‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ارﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ ﻋﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺘﻐري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒ ًﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫أو ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺰودة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪Letter Box 4:3‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ وﺿﻊ‬
‫أﴍﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫واﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫أﺑﻌﺎدﻫﺎ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ واﻗﺘﺼﺎص اﻷﺟﺰاء ﻏري‬
‫اﳌﻼمئﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ZAPPIN Time‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫‪٬(z) 15sec ٬6sec‬‬
‫‪30sec‬‬
‫‪) ZAPPIN Tone‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.ZAPPIN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑني ﻓﻘﺮات اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 5‬أﻗﺮاص*‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫* ‪DVD VIDEO/VCD/DivX/‬‬
‫‪ MPEG-4‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪم ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﻘﺮص‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﳌﻠﻔﺎت ‪DivX/MPEG-‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪم ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ VCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ VCD‬ﺑﺪون وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪4:3‬‬
‫‪ "Letter Box‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ‬
‫"‪ ،"Pan Scan 4:3‬واﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Pan Scan 4:3‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪Multi Disc Resume‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪USB Resume‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪JPEG Slide Show‬‬
‫‪٬20sec ٬(z) 5sec‬‬
‫‪Fixed ٬60sec‬‬
‫‪) Video CD PBC‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻋﺮض ‪DVD‬وإﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ C "Visual" C‬اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ‪ C‬اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻫﺬا اﻹﺟﺮاء‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ" ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ "z" .‬ﻳﺸري إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪DVD Menu Language‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Audio Language‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Subtitle Language‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) Standard‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio DRC‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺨﻔﺎض ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪ *DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪) Audio DRC‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﳌﺪى‬
‫اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك( ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wide‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﻌﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮاﺟﺪ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺤﻔﻠﺔ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ًة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪DVD-R/DVD-R DL/DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ‪.VR‬‬
‫‪Multi Ch Output‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ أﺳﻠﻮب إﺧﺮاج ﻣﺼﺎدر‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫‪Stereo‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻂ واﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗني‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Parental Control‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ أﺣﺪ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Parental Rating‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Parental Area‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) Original‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﰲ اﻷﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪّﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) Chapter‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل‪.‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD Playlist Play‬‬
‫)ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DVD-R/DVD-R DL/‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪DVD Direct Search‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(25‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﻋﻦ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪(z) Multi‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺧﺮاج ﻋﱪ ﻗﻨﻮات ‪.4.1‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪ُ ) RBE‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺠﻬري اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪Crossover Filter‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪ (HPF‬وﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)‪.(LPF‬‬
‫‪4.1ch Speaker Level‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫‪،RBE1 ،(z) OFF‬‬
‫‪RBE3 ،RBE2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪60 ،50 Hz :LPF‬‬
‫‪100 ،80 Hz ،Hz‬‬
‫‪120 Hz ،(z) Hz‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪) .‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪(."ON‬‬
‫‪(z) OFF :HPF‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪم ﻗﻄﻊ اﻟﱰدد‪.‬‬
‫‪،50 Hz :HPF‬‬
‫‪80 Hz ،60 Hz‬‬
‫‪120 Hz ،100 Hz‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Subwoofer‬‬
‫‪:Phase‬‬
‫)‪،Normal (z‬‬
‫‪Reverse‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ "‪(."ON‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ C "Screen" C‬اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ‪ C‬اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻫﺬا اﻹﺟﺮاء‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ" ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ "z" .‬ﻳﺸري إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪) Screen Select‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Picture EQ‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬
‫‪،(z) Dynamic‬‬
‫‪،Standard‬‬
‫‪Sepia ،Theater‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪،Custom 1‬‬
‫‪Custom 2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪،(z) Full‬‬
‫‪،Normal‬‬
‫‪،Wide‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﱃ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Aspect‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(49‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎر‪/‬إﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Demo‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪.‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ C "Sound" C‬اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ‪ C‬اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻫﺬا اﻹﺟﺮاء‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ" ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ "z" .‬ﻳﺸري إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪) EQ7‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫‪(z) OFF‬‬
‫‪،Vocal ،Xplod‬‬
‫‪،Cruise ،Edge‬‬
‫‪،Gravity ،Space‬‬
‫‪Custom‬‬
‫‪) Balance/Fader‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫‪Listening Position‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(45‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع وﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪:Balance‬‬
‫)‪(–15 ~ +15‬‬
‫‪:Fader‬‬
‫)‪(–15 ~ +15‬‬
‫‪0 :z‬‬
‫‪:Subwoofer‬‬
‫)‪(–6 ~ +6‬‬
‫‪0 :z‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪) .‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ "‪(."ON‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪم ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ اﻷﻳﴪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ اﻷميﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(46‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ "‪،"ON‬‬
‫وﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪ "Front L‬أو "‪ "Front R‬أو‬
‫"‪ "Front‬أو "‪(."All‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) OFF‬‬
‫‪Front L‬‬
‫‪Front R‬‬
‫‪All‬‬
‫‪Custom‬‬
‫‪:Subwoofer‬‬
‫‪Normal ،Near‬‬
‫)‪Far ،(z‬‬
‫‪Subwoofer‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت؛ ﻗﻢ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫‪Front‬‬
‫‪) CSO‬ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ(‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫‪،(z) OFF‬‬
‫‪،CSO2 ،CSO1‬‬
‫‪CSO3‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‪.USB/‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﲆ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪Key Illumination‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺿﺎءة اﻷزرار‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺿﺎءة اﻷزرار‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪Rotary Commander‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻻﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﲇ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻔﺎح اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺪوار‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX1 Input‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮاف‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ AUX1 IN‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX2 Input‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮاف‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ AUX2 IN‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Signal‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم‬
‫اﻛﺘﺸﺎف إﺷﺎرة ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Camera Input‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ دﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(z) Default‬‬
‫‪Reverse‬‬
‫‪(z) Video‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷميﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ دﺧﻞ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫‪(z) Video‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ دﺧﻞ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫‪Through‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸري ﻟﻌﺪم وﺟﻮد‬
‫إﺷﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ‬
‫إﺧﻄﺎر ﺑﻌﺪم وﺟﻮد إﺷﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺼﺒﺎح اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)أو ﺿﺒﻂ ذراع اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪R‬‬
‫)رﺟﻮع ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ((‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪(z) Blank‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rear View Camera Setting‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪) Monitor Angle‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ C "General" C‬اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ‪ C‬اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻫﺬا اﻹﺟﺮاء‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ" ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ "z" .‬ﻳﺸري إﱃ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‪) Security Control‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫‪) Clock Adjust‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(57‬‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫‪Auto OFF‬‬
‫‪(z) No‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﴤ وﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮب أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،30min ،30sec .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪60min‬‬
‫‪) CT‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22 ،21‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪(z) OFF‬‬
‫‪Output Color System‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻧﻈﺎم اﻷﻟﻮان وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ SECAM‬ﻏري ﻣﺪﻋﻮم‪(.‬‬
‫‪Dimmer‬‬
‫‪(z) PAL‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪(z) Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري درﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪Dimmer Level‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى درﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﳌﻌﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(–5 ~ +5‬‬
‫‪0 :z‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺘﺎم اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﺿﻮاء‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءة‪(.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺘﺎم اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫‪Touch Panel Adjust‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(47‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Beep‬‬
‫‪(z) ON‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪،(z) English‬‬
‫‪،Español‬‬
‫‪Русский‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.PAL‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﱃ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Normal‬اﻟﺼﻮر ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪) 4:3‬اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎدﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Wide‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒري اﻟﺼﻮرة ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘني‬
‫اﻟﻴﴪى واﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ,‬ﻣﻊ اﻗﺘﺼﺎص‬
‫اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺰاﺋﺪة ﺑﺎﻷﻋﲆ واﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﳌﻞء‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Full‬اﻟﺼﻮر ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ‪.16:9‬‬
‫"‪ :"Zoom‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒري اﻟﺼﻮر ذات ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻴﴪى واﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Screen‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Aspect‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﲆ اﻟﻔﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"General‬اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50‬‬
‫"‪ :"Sound‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(52‬‬
‫"‪ :"Screen‬إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(53‬‬
‫"‪ :"Visual‬إﻋﺪادات ﻋﺮض ‪ DVD‬وإﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Locked‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Security Control‬‬
‫‪Clock Adjust‬‬
‫‪No‬‬
‫‪Auto OFF‬‬
‫‪OFF / ON‬‬
‫‪CT‬‬
‫‪1/4‬‬
‫‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪Visual‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫‪Output Color System‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Screen‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﱃ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Screen Select‬‬
‫‪Dynamic‬‬
‫‪Picture EQ‬‬
‫‪Full‬‬
‫‪Aspect‬‬
‫‪OFF / ON‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫‪OFF / ON‬‬
‫‪Visual‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪Screen‬‬
‫‪Demo‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Demo‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪ "ON‬أو "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰم ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.V/v‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ واﳌﺼﻮر اﳌﺮيئ ودرﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮع‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Screen‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Screen Select‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﺳﻤﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Screen Theme‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد اﳌﺼﻮر اﳌﺮيئ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Visualizer‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد درﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Day / Night mode‬ﺛﻢ أﺣﺪ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎران "‪ "Custom 1‬و"‪ "Custom 2‬ﰲ ‪Picture‬‬
‫‪ EQ‬ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪاد ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫درﺟﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Screen‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Picture EQ‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Custom 1‬أو "‪ ،"Custom 2‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."Custom Tune‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Picture EQ : Custom Tune‬‬
‫‪Warm‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Cool‬‬
‫"‪ :"Auto‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﺿﻮاء‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءة‪(.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Always Day‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﰲ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻬﺎر‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Always Night‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﰲ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Warm‬أو "‪ "Normal‬أو "‪ "Cool‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫"‪."Color Tone‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ ‪ –/+‬ﰲ "‪ "Brightness‬و"‪ "Color‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬام‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫— ‪Picture EQ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮدة ﺻﻮرة ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة ﺻﻮرة ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺪرﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Dynamic‬ﻟﺼﻮرة زاﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮان ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ وواﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Standard‬ﻟﺠﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Theater‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم ذات اﻹﺿﺎءة‬
‫اﻟﺪاﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Sepia‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ درﺟﺔ اﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﺒﻨﻲ اﻟﺪاﻛﻦ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Custom 2" ،"Custom 1‬اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(48‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪Color‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Color Tone‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Screen‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Picture EQ‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻲ "‪) "Front R‬اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ( و"‪) "Front L‬اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى( و"‪Surround‬‬
‫‪) "L‬اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﴪى( و"‪) "Surround R‬اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫و*"‪."Subwoofer‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت وﺿﺒﻂ "‪"Subwoofer‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."4.1ch Speaker Level‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ أﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."General‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Monitor Angle‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ –‪ +/‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫وإﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪4.1ch Speaker Level‬‬
‫‪Front R‬‬
‫‪Front L‬‬
‫‪Surround R‬‬
‫‪Surround L‬‬
‫‪Subwoofer‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪ –/+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪ ,‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Reset‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﺰم ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."General‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﻌﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Touch Panel Adjust‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻷﻫﺪاف ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﳌﻌﺎﻳﺮة‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Cancel‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت وإﻋﺪاد ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫— ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧري اﻟﺼﻮت إﱃ اﳌﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‪ ،‬ﻗﺲ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑني ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع وﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Sound‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Listening Position‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Custom‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Custom Tune‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫— ‪CSO‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺠﺴﻢ متﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻔﻲ وﺟﻮد ‪ 5‬ﺳامﻋﺎت‬
‫)أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﴪى‪/‬ميﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻳﴪى‪/‬ميﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ( وﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫واﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪) CSO‬ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ( إﻧﺸﺎء ﺳامﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Position Tune‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫)‪(cm‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ ‪ –/+‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑني ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫واﻟﺴامﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑني ‪ 0‬و‪ 400‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪ ,‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Reset‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺑﻌﺪ ﳌﺲ "‪ "OK‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،USB/‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."CSO‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "CSO1‬أو "‪ "CSO2‬أو "‪."CSO3‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن "‪ "CSO‬ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Multi Ch Output‬ﻋﲆ "‪"Multi‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (54‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺼﺎدر ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫— ‪RBE‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ‪ُ ) RBE‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ اﻟﺠﻬري اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﺻﻮت اﻟﺠﻬري ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ إﻋﺪاد ﻣﺮﺷﺢ اﻟﺠﻬري اﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (53‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت ﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."RBE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "RBE1‬أو "‪ "RBE2‬أو "‪."RBE3‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﺧﺮى ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴني اﻟﺼﻮت ﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫— ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮازن اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑني اﻟﺴامﻋﺘني اﻟﻴﴪى واﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫)"‪ ("Balance‬واﻟﺴامﻋﺘني اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ واﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )"‪("Fader‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت إذا‬
‫ﻛﺎن ﻣﺘﺼ ًﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Balance/Fader‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة ﺗﻐﻴري متﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺄﺧري إﺧﺮاج‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻚ‪ ،‬وﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎة ﺣﻘﻞ ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺸﻌﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮاﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ أﻳﻨام ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ ﺧﻴﺎرات "‪ "Listening Position‬أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :"Front L" (1‬أﻣﺎﻣﻲ أﻳﴪ‬
‫)‪ :"Front R" (2‬أﻣﺎﻣﻲ أميﻦ‬
‫)‪ :"Front" (3‬أﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫)‪ :"All" (4‬ﰲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‬
‫"‪ :"Custom‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ متﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(46‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﺑﺪون ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Balance/Fader/Subwoofer Level Adjust‬‬
‫‪Subwoofer : 0‬‬
‫‪Fader : 0‬‬
‫‪Balance : 0‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ B/V/v/b‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻮازن‪/‬اﳌﺘﻮاري‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﻗﺎﺑ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة ﺑني ‪–15‬‬
‫و ‪ +15 (Balance)/–15‬و)‪.+15 (Fader‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ ‪ –/+‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻗﺎﺑ ًﻼ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت وﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ "‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ (52‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني ‪ –6‬و ‪.+6‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إذا‪:‬‬
‫– ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت وﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪) "ON‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬
‫– ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻋﲆ "‪ "Front L‬أو "‪ "Front R‬أو‬
‫"‪ "Front‬أو "‪."All‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Listening Position‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Front L‬أو "‪ "Front R‬أو "‪ "Front‬أو "‪"All‬‬
‫أو "‪."Custom‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "Front L‬أو "‪ "Front R‬أو‬
‫"‪ "Front‬أو "‪ "All‬ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪ 4‬أﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Near‬أو "‪ "Normal‬أو "‪."Far‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫—‪EQ7‬‬
‫"‪*"Signal‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﺷﺎرة ‪."OFF"،"ON" :Bluetooth‬‬
‫"‪) 1*"Discoverable‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴامح ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪:‬‬
‫"‪."Hide" ،"Show‬‬
‫"‪*"Device Name‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﺳﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ‪("Sony Automotive" :‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﳼ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ,‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.42‬‬
‫"‪) 1*"Search‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫"‪) 1*"Device List‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(36‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ؛ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺴﺠﻞ؛ ﻟﺤﺬف‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‪.‬‬
‫"‪*"Auto Answer‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺑني ‪ 7‬أﻧﻮاع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫)"‪ "Xplod‬أو "‪ "Vocal‬أو "‪ "Edge‬أو "‪ "Cruise‬أو‬
‫"‪ "Space‬أو "‪ "Gravity‬أو "‪ "Custom‬أو "‪.("OFF‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Sound‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."EQ7‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﳌﻌﺎدل اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﳌﻌﺎدل‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮد ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ واردة ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– "‪ :"Short‬ﻟﻠﺮد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬
‫– "‪ :"Long‬ﻟﻠﺮد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬
‫– "‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻌﺪم اﻟﺮد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪* *"Ringtone‬‬
‫‪2 1‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫"‪."Cellular" ،"Default‬‬
‫"‪) "EC/NC Mode‬إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺼﺪى‪/‬وﺿﻊ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺼﺪى واﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﰲ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪ "Mode 1‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻏري ُﻣﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪ "Mode 2‬أو "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت — ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ‪EQ7‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ إﻋﺪاد "‪ "Custom‬اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑـ‪ EQ7‬ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻦ ﺑني‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ 62 :‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪ 157‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪ 396‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪ 2.5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪ 6.3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ و‪ 16‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Sound‬ﺛﻢ "‪."EQ7‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Custom‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Tune‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫"‪) "MIC Gain‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(39‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬إﱃ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪EQ7 Tune : Custom‬‬
‫"‪*"Initialize‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ "Yes‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪16 kHz‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻳﺪي‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ "‪."Cellular‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل إﻋﺪاد أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻷﺧﺮى‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻷدﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6.3 kHz‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2.5 kHz‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1 kHz‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪396 Hz‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪157 Hz‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪62 Hz‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ ‪ –/+‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺮدد ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني ‪ –8‬و ‪.+8‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪ ,‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."Reset‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﳌﻨﻊ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻏري اﳌﴫح ﺑﻪ إﱃ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﻋﱪ إﻋﺪاد رﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫مبﺠﺮد اﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."PIM Security‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹﻋﺎدة إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Clear‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 2‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ ،"Complete‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) A2DP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻘﺪم( ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪) Bluetooth‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(36‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."BT Audio‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) AVRCP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(18‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫"‪"Play Menu‬‬
‫"‪c"BT Menu‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬
‫‪ –/+‬ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺮوق ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑني‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﺨﻄﻮات‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني –‪ 8‬و ‪.18+‬‬
‫"‪"Connect‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫"‪"Level‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏري اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰم ﳌﺲ ‪ u‬ﻣﺮﺗني ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻹﺷﺎرات ﻣﺜﻞ اﺳﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ وﻣﺎ‬
‫إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ إﻋﺪادات ‪ Bluetooth‬ﰲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﺼﺪر ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Audio‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Contact Name‬‬
‫‪Please Input Name‬‬
‫‪NAME‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ "ABC‬أو "‪"abc‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺤﺮف اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫”‪“123‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪/‬اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‬
‫"‪"Space‬‬
‫"‪"OK‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺣﺮف‪.‬‬
‫إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮف‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﱃ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪/‬اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫إدﺧﺎل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﺣﺮف‪.‬‬
‫إﻛامل ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫إدارة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة مبﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة مبﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Recent Call‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Delete All‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﻋﻨﴫ ﻓﺮدي مبﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 2‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Delete Number‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣُﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺪﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ أول ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳامء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Preset Memory‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب )ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Recent Call‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Preset Memory‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب )ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﻮارد أﻋﻼه واﺳﺘﺒﺪل اﺗﺼﺎﻻً ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ُﻣﺴﺠ ًﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷﺣﺮف ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ,‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.42‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض دﻓﱰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) PBAP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل أو إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."PB Access‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Access‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻮي‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."Memory‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪."SIM‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Phonebook Browsing‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ أول ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳامء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺠﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Delete All‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 2‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻟﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ أول ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳامء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Delete Contact‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻦ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ أول ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳامء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪"Edit Name‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Yes‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫"‪"Add Number‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Save to Phonebook‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Yes‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺪرج‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."OK‬‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬أدﺧﻞ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺬف رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪،"Delete Number‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫إدارة دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 300‬ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﰲ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫وﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 5‬أرﻗﺎم ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻻﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬وﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫)اﻻﺳﻢ وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ( ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪان ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﱪ إدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Add Contact‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Add Contact‬‬
‫‪Empty‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪Empty‬‬
‫‪1/1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) PBAP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫وﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."PB Access‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Access‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ "‪."Memory‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﲆ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."SIM‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Phonebook Download‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻛﺘامل اﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "Complete‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫واﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪Receive‬‬
‫‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ًة ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈرﺳﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﱪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‬
‫اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻛﺘامل اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "Complete‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫?‪Add to Phonebook‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Empty‬ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ اﻷول‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷﺣﺮف ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ,‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.42‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Empty‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻧﻮع رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎل أرﻗﺎم ﻫﺎﺗﻒ أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬إﱃ ‪.8‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "?‪"Add to Phonebook‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Recent Call‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ مبﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ إﱃ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Save to Phonebook‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﰲ أي ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸري اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ إﱃ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ واردة ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧني‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪BT Menu‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪On the Line.‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Incoming call...‬‬
‫‪0123456789‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Open Keypad‬‬
‫‪Handsfree OFF‬‬
‫‪0123456789‬‬
‫‪10:59‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪Incoming call...‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮد ﻋﲆ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ –/+ (VOL‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث داﺧﻞ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني‬
‫ﻹرﺳﺎل ﻧﻐامت ‪) DTMF‬اﻟﱰدد اﳌﺘﻌﺪد ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ –/+ (VOL‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻲ إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني داﺧﻞ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Open Keypad‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Handsfree OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪Handsfree‬‬
‫‪."ON‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني وﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺮد ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧني اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي أو ﺑﻬﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."MIC Gain‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ –‪ +/‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني ‪ –2‬و‪.+2‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Back‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ أن ﻳﺮد اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Calling...‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪0123456789‬‬
‫‪Calling...‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ إدارة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪,‬‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ "إدارة دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.40‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Phonebook‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪد ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ أول ﺣﺮف ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺳامء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Call‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ أن ﻳﺮد اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وإﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(41‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰّن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة آﺧﺮ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣام ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪاﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Recent Call‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Call‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ أن ﻳﺮد اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ إﱃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 6‬ﺟﻬﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل ﰲ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ُﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.42‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ )ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﱃ أن ﻳﺮد اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻮيت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺼﻮيت اﳌﺨﺰن ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Voice Dial‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﻧﻄﻖ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺼﻮيت اﳌﺨﺰن ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺮد اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• اﻧﻄﻖ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺼﻮيت ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻮيت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻮيت ﻋﲆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي أﺛﻨﺎء اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻬﺬه‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪاﺧﻞ أﺻﻮات اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺮك ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺴني ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﻇﺮوف أﻗﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻮيت وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺮف اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ –/+ (VOL‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﺟﺮاء إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺘﺤﺪث داﺧﻞ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻣﺼﺪر ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Audio‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Device List‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Handsfree Connect‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Audio Connect‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻹﺟﺮاء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻨﺠﺎح‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أو أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼل اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺂﺧﺮ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﺗﺼﺎ ًﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎز ﺻﻮت ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪ ،"BT Audio‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Connect‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ أﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي ﻟﻐﺮض ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت إذا ﻛﺎن ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪A2DP‬‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻘﺪم(‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫مبﺠﺮد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﱪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻃﻠﺐ رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪"BT Phone‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪BT Menu‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Preset Dial‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫‪Voice Dial‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻨﺠﺎح‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أو أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪Handsfree‬‬
‫‪ "Disconnect‬أو "‪."Audio Disconnect‬‬
‫‪PB Access‬‬
‫‪P3‬‬
‫‪P2‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪P6‬‬
‫‪P5‬‬
‫‪P4‬‬
‫‪BT phone‬‬
‫‪Call Menu‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Call Menu‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Dial‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼت‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Delete All‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Yes‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Dial‬‬
‫‪Please input phone number.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺮد‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻘﺮر ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪Delete this device‬‬
‫‪."from List‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Yes‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Search‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل‪* *.‬‬
‫‪2 1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻛﺘامل اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ*‪.3‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺷﺎرة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪد اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض أﺳامء اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ أو ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻨﻬﺎ )ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﻓﺮ اﻻﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Handsfree Connect‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Audio Connect‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻹﺟﺮاء ﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻹﻗﺮان وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻗﺮان وﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻨﺠﺎح‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أو أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ورد ﴍح إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﺼﺪر ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Audio‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ إﻋﺪاد ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Signal‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Yes‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Signal‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫"‪."ON‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﺷﺎرة ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Discoverable‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."Show‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺟﺎﻫﺰة ﻟﻴﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻛﺘامل اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ك "‪Sony‬‬
‫‪ *"Automotive‬ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫* ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴريه ﰲ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) Bluetooth‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬
‫‪DR-BT30Q‬‬
‫‪Sony‬‬
‫‪Automotive‬‬
‫‪XXXXXXX‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ اﻹﻗﺮان وﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻨﺠﺎح‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أو أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻛﺘﺸﺎف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜني اﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎف‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺤﺎﱄ واﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺒﺎدل ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻌﺮف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﺒﺤﺚ أو اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺒﻞ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) HSP‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺳامﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﺷﺎرة ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ آﺧﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ إن أﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﺷﺎرة ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﲆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (44‬وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪gL,`NXse‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﺼﻮت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج‬
‫ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮاز ‪) XA-MC10‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ إﺷﺎرة ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻳﴤء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن إﺷﺎرة‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻗﺮان ﻣﻄﻠﻮ ًﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ اﳌﺮة اﻷوﱃ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪) Bluetooth‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻗﺮان ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إدﺧﺎل ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور*‪ 2‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور إﻣﺎ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‬
‫أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﺤﺪد ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Calling...‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪0123456789‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬف ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إﺟﺮاء‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور "رﻣﺰ اﳌﺮور" أو "رﻗﻢ ‪ "PIN‬أو "ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور"‬
‫أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ إﻗﺮان ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 9‬أﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪Calling...‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻃﺮاز ‪XA-MC10‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍات ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻐﺮض ﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫واﻣﺾ‪ :‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺪم‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﴤء‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫واﻣﺾ‪ :‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺪم‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﴤء‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺒﻖ )اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﻛﺘﺸﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﺼﺪر ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ ،(TOP‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "BT Phone‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Audio‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮت ‪ ،Bluetooth‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫"‪."BT Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪BT Menu‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪OFF / ON‬‬
‫‪Signal‬‬
‫‪Hide / Show‬‬
‫‪Discoverable‬‬
‫‪Device Name‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Device List‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل رﺳﻢ‬
‫إﺷﺎرة اﻷﻣﺮ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ارﺳﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ أﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻦ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر إﱃ )متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪(.‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﻤني(‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪:DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ >‪(.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ أﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ اﻟﻴﻤني إﱃ )متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪(..‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﺴﺎر(‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪:DVD/VCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪(..‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪(..‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ )اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻟﻸﻣﺎم(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ رأﳼ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪DVD/VCD/‬‬
‫)ﻟﻸﻋﲆ(‬
‫‪:DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ رأﳼ‬
‫)ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪/JPEG‬ﺻﻮت‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ أﻟﺒﻮم )ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ "‪(.+ "Album‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ )اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪DVD/VCD/‬‬
‫‪:DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫إرﺟﺎع اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ‪/JPEG‬ﺻﻮت‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ أﻟﺒﻮم )ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)متﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ "‪(.– "Album‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻹرﺷﺎدات ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ وﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫— ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ — ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻷﺳﺎﳼ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﻹﻗﺮان‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮة اﻷوﱃ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم إﺟﺮاء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺒﺎدل‪ .‬وﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮان"‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )اﻹﻗﺮان( ﻣﻄﻠﻮ ًﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺮة اﻷوﱃ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻷﺧﺮى ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺮة اﻟﻘﺎدﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬف ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إﺟﺮاء‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻹﻗﺮان‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ .Bluetooth‬وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﺟﺮاء‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬أو‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪة‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ —‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎرات اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ — ‪ZAPPINTM‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت‪/‬اﳌﺠﻠﺪات‪/‬اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻟﻸﻗﺮاص ذات ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MP3/‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﺜري ﻣﻦ اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت‪/‬اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."List‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻔﺌﺎت أو اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Contents List‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻘﺼرية ﰲ ﻗﺮص أو ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ إﺣﺪى اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫إﺣﺪى اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ أو وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."ZAP‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ أﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر ﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬وﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﺻﻔري ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪File 01‬‬
‫‪File 02‬‬
‫‪1/5‬‬
‫‪File 03‬‬
‫‪File 04‬‬
‫‪File 05‬‬
‫‪File 06‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﴍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﱃ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻷﻋﲆ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑني اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺣﺘﻮاء ﻗﺮص‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪،‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد )ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ أوﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻘﺮص ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ وﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺻﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ .‬وميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب إدراﺟﻪ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."List‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Audio‬أو "‪ "Image‬أو "‪"Video‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Close‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.ZAPPIN‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﳌﺲ "‪."ZAP‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "ZAP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮد اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل وﺿﻊ ‪ ZAPPIN‬ﻣﺮة‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗني ‪ 1‬و ‪.2‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "SensMeTM channels‬أو‬
‫"‪"SensMeTM mood‬‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﱃ وﺿﻊ ‪ ZAPPIN‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫"‪ "SensMeTM channels‬أو "‪ ،"SensMeTM mood‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻛرث أﻗﺴﺎم اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻟﺤﻨًﺎ أو إﻳﻘﺎﻋًﺎ*‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،SensMeTM‬اﻧﻈﺮ "اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺰاج — ‪ "SensMeTM‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.27‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(55‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺼﻔري ﺑني ﻣﺴﺎرات اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(55‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫"‪ "Repeat‬أو "‪ "Shuffle‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر أو اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪"Album"/"Podcast"/"Artist"/"Playlist"/‬‬
‫"‪ :*"Genre‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪"Rental"/"TV Show"/"Music Video"/‬‬
‫"‪ :*"Playlist"/"Podcast‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫‪"Album"/"Podcast"/"Artist"/"Playlist"/‬‬
‫"‪ :*"Genre‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Device‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫— ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫"‪ "Passenger Control‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."ON‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ "‪ "Passenger Control‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐري وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺮاج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.iPod‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻜﺮار إذا ﺗﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﻮل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ "iPod‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 61‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪gL,`NXse‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ُ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم "‪ "iPod‬ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﺎم ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ iPod‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎزي ‪ iPod‬أو ‪ ،iPhone‬ﻣﺎ مل ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼف ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻨﺺ أو اﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮاز ‪RC-200IPV‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت‬
‫اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ*‪ ،iPod 2‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺒﺪأ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ آﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﴫ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."USB/iPod‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﳌﺪة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫أوﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻠﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ مبﻮﺻﻞ إرﺳﺎء‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐري‬
‫وﺿﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف وﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻹﻋﺪاد ﺗﻜﺮار‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت ﺑﺸﺄن ﺟﻬﺎز ‪iPhone‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﱪ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPhone‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬وﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺻﺪور ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎلٍ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺣﺪى‬
‫اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ iPod‬ﻋﱪ ﻣﻮزع ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إدارة ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك إﱃ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ACC‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.iPod‬‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض "‪USB device is‬‬
‫‪ "not connected‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ أﺣﺪ أوﺿﺎع اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫"‪،"Playlist" ،"Genre" ،"Track" ،"Album‬‬
‫"‪*"Podcast" ،"Artist‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﻣﺰود ﺑﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮاز ‪.RC-200IPV‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod touch‬أو ‪ ،iPhone‬أو‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﰲ آﺧﺮ ﻣﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻛﺎب‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ واﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮض‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.18‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ "اﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫"‪Music" ،"TV Show" ،"Rental" ،"Movie‬‬
‫‪*"Podcast" ،"Playlist" ،"Video‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.iPod‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."List‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "MUSIC‬أو "‪."VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ )اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ( اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ –‪ +/‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ واﻹﺷﺎرات أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪"mood‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج‬
‫— ‪SensMe™ mood‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮم "‪ "SensMeTM mood‬ﺑﺘﻮزﻳﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ ﺻﻮرة‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﲆ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج ذات ﻣﺤﻮرﻳﻦ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻨﺎدًا إﱃ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﳌﻨﻔﺮدة‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﳌﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ وﻓﻘﺎ ﳌﺰاﺟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ داﺋﺮة ﺣﻮل اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻹﻋﺪاد وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.SensMe‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."mood‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج ذات اﳌﺤﻮرﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫داﺋﺮة‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Mood‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪Happy‬‬
‫‪Sad‬‬
‫‪Style‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪ZAP‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎط متﺜﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫&‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Mood‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪Happy‬‬
‫‪Sad‬‬
‫‪Style‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪ZAP‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫*)‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫'‬
‫(‬
‫‪ A‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪،"Source List" ،"ATT" :‬‬
‫"‪) ."Top‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة وإﻋﺎدة ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪ :‬ﺻﻐرية أو ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ أو ﻛﺒرية‪.‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮم*‪.1‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﴤ واﺳﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ واﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨﺎن‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﻌﻠامت ﻋﲆ اﳌﺤﻮر اﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ إﺣﺪى اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ H‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) .ZAPPIN‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ZAPPIN‬ﰲ "‪ ،"SensMeTM mood‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﻛرث ﻟﺤﻨًﺎ أو إﻳﻘﺎﻋًﺎ* ﻣﻦ ﺑني اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ داﺋﺮة ﺣﻮل اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﻣﻦ أﻛرث أﻗﺴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﻨًﺎ أو‬
‫إﻳﻘﺎﻋًﺎ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ آﺧﺮ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧ ًﺮا ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫"‪ "Content Transfer‬داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻏري ﻣﻼمئﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺰاج اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺣﺘﻮاء ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺜري ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪،"SensMeTM mood‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻘﺮاءة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬
‫• ﰲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﻤﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺧﴬاء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺑﺪ ًءا ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎرج ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة إﱃ ﺧﺎرﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﱰاوح اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 240 × 240‬إﱃ ‪ 960 × 960‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻌﻠامت ﻋﲆ اﳌﺤﻮر اﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﰲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻌﻠامت ﻋﲆ اﳌﺤﻮر اﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫إﻋﺎدة وﺿﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﳌﻌﻠامت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﻌﻠامت إﱃ‬
‫اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪"Mood‬‬
‫"‪"Type‬‬
‫"‪"Style‬‬
‫"‪"Time‬‬
‫"‪"Sad" – "Happy‬‬
‫"‪"Acoustic" – "Electronic‬‬
‫"‪"Soft" – "Hard‬‬
‫"‪"Morning" – "Midnight‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫‪ x‬اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪Shuffle All ،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ واﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض "‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪"channels‬‬
‫&‬
‫"‪ 5:00) "Morning‬ص – ‪ 9:59‬ص(‬
‫"‪ 10:00) "Daytime‬ص – ‪ 3:59‬م(‬
‫"‪ 4:00) "Evening‬م – ‪ 6:59‬م(‬
‫"‪ 7:00) "Night‬م – ‪ 11:59‬م(‬
‫"‪ 12:00) "Midnight‬ص – ‪ 4:59‬ص(‬
‫ُﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻞ وﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﻮم‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (57‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Shuffle All‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Energetic‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺣامﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Relax‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻫﺎدﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Mellow‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت رﻗﻴﻘﺔ وﺣﺰﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Upbeat‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺳﻌﻴﺪة ﻟﺘﺤﺴني ﻣﺰاﺟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Emotional‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺷﺎﻋﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Lounge‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﱰﺧﺎء‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Dance‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت إﻳﻘﺎع وﻃﺒﻞ وإﻳﻘﺎع وأﻟﺤﺎن ﻛﺌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Extreme‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت روك ﺣﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻗﻨﻮات داﺧﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪Shuffle All‬‬
‫‪Energetic‬‬
‫‪Relax‬‬
‫‪ZAP‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫) (‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫'‬
‫‪ A‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪."Source List" ،"ATT" ،"Top" :‬‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮم*‪.1‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إﱃ وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﴤ واﺳﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ واﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨﺎن‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ إﺣﺪى اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ H‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) .ZAPPIN‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ‪ ZAPPIN‬ﰲ "‪،"SensMe™ channels‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻛرث اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻟﺤﻨًﺎ أو إﻳﻘﺎﻋًﺎ*‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺑني‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﱰاوح اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 240 × 240‬إﱃ ‪ 960 × 960‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Freeway‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﴎﻳﻌﺔ وﺣامﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Chillout Drive‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺷﺎﻋﺮﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﻓﻴﺔ ورﺧﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Weekend Trip‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺣﺔ وﻣﴩﻗﺔ وﺳﻌﻴﺪة‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Midnight Cruise‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺠﺎز أو‬
‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ذات ﻣﺰاج ﻧﺎﺿﺞ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Party Ride‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﴎﻳﻌﺔ وﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Morning Commute‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﴩﻗﺔ وﻣﺮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Goin' Home‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت داﻓﺌﺔ وﺑﺎﻋﺜﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﱰﺧﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪"Setup‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‬
‫— ‪SensMe™ channels‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮ ًﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻜني وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ "‪ "SensMeTM channels‬ﻋﲆ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻘﻨﻮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺰاﺟﻚ وﻧﺸﺎﻃﻚ وﻣﺎ‬
‫إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات‬
‫أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "SensMeTM Setup‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬أﻛﻤﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﲆ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ُ USB‬ﻣ ّ‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻹﻋﺪاد وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."channels‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫‪Shuffle All‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫"‪"Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜني وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SensMeTM‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت وﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ُ USB‬ﻣ ّ‬
‫"‪."Content Transfer‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣُﺴﺠّ ﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ إﱃ "‪ ،"WALKMAN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫وﺿﻊ ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )‪.(MTP‬‬
‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﺨﻼف "‪ ،"WALKMAN‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ﻓﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒرية اﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫)‪.(MSC‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "Content Transfer‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر إﺣﺪى اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ‪Windows Explorer‬‬
‫أو ‪ iTunes‬أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ وإﻓﻼﺗﻬﺎ ﰲ "‪Content‬‬
‫‪."Transfer‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت وﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫"‪."Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪ TONE ANALYSIS 12‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﻹﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت وﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻞ ميﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر أو ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪ ."Content Transfer‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت "‪."Content Transfer‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪Energetic‬‬
‫‪Relax‬‬
‫‪ZAP‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻷوﱃ ﰲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻛرث أﻗﺴﺎم‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﻨًﺎ أو إﻳﻘﺎﻋًﺎ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﰲ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻏري ﻣﻼمئﺔ ﳌﺰاج اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺣﺘﻮاء ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻋﲆ ﻛﺜري ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ ،"SensMeTM channels‬وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪ .‬وﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺰاج‬
‫— ‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺗﺎ "‪ "SensMeTM channels‬و"‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫‪ "mood‬اﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺗﺎن ﻣﻦ ‪ Sony‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة أو اﳌﺰاج‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ™‪SensMe‬‬
‫ﻓﻴام ﻳﲇ اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻷﺳﺎﳼ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫™‪ SensMe‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ "‪ "SensMe™ Setup‬و"‪Content‬‬
‫‪ "Transfer‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ أوﻻً ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ "‪ "SensMeTM Setup‬و"‪Content‬‬
‫‪ "Transfer‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Content‬‬
‫‪Transfer‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪Content‬‬
‫‪"Transfer‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة أو اﳌﺰاج‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ أمنﺎط ﺻﻮت اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻧﻈﺎم ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻐامت ‪ ،TONE ANALYSIS 12‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﰲ "‪."Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ‪ Windows Explorer‬أو ‪ iTunes‬أو ﻣﺎ‬
‫إﱃ ذﻟﻚ وإﻓﻼﺗﻬﺎ ﰲ "‪."Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺟﺮاء ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت وﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﱪ "‪Content‬‬
‫‪."Transfer‬‬
‫‪Content‬‬
‫‪Transfer‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬واﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫™‪SensMe‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ إﻋﺪاده‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ "‪ "SensMeTM channels‬أو‬
‫"‪ "SensMeTM mood‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪"SensMeTM Setup‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪ "SensMeTM Setup‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜني وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ SensMeTM‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫™‪SensMe‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫™‪SensMe‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ "‪ "SensMeTM Setup‬و"‪Content‬‬
‫‪ "Transfer‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ )"‪"SensMeTM Setup‬‬
‫و"‪ ("Content Transfer‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮ ًﺑﺎ ﻟﺘﻤﻜني وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪SensMeTM‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ أو ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﻀﻐﻮط ﰲ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛامل اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪gL,`NXse‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio/‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪) MSC‬ﻓﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺒرية اﻟﺴﻌﺔ( و‪) MTP‬ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ (.mp3) MP3‬و‪WMA‬‬
‫)‪ (.wma‬و‪ (.m4a) AAC‬و‪ (.jpg) JPEG‬و‪DivX‬‬
‫)‪ (.avi‬و‪.(.mp4) MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺮك‪.‬‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻋﻄﻞ أو ﺗﻠﻒ إذا ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺤﺮك‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺒري اﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫مبﻮﺻﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،USB‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."USB/iPod‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬اﻧﻈﺮ دﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ واﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.18‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل اﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ "اﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﳌﺪة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫أوﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻠﻪ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻛﺒرية ﺟﺪًا أو ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫اﻻﻫﺘﺰاز‪ ،‬أو ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ارﺗﺨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﱰك ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎرة ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻋﻄﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ USB‬ﻋﱪ ﻣﻮزع ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺣﺘﻮاء ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬ﻋﲆ أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد )ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة( ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪ ,‬اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻠﻒ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.33‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻹﺷﺎرات اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ا ُﳌﺴﺠﻞ واﻹﻋﺪادات‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ‬
‫وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫– اﳌﺠﻠﺪات )اﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎت(‪256 :‬‬
‫– اﳌﻠﻔﺎت )اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت(‪2,000 :‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض أو اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬اﻹرﺟﺎع ﳌﻠﻒ ‪MP3/WMA/AAC‬‬
‫ذات ‪) VBR‬ﻣﻌﺪل ﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐري(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﴤ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺪون ﻓﻘﺪان ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫"‪ "Repeat‬أو "‪ "Shuffle‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر أو اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :1*"Track"/"Image"/"Movie‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ( اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :2*"Drive‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻣﺤﺮك اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ‬
‫اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ( اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﺮﻛني أو أﻛرث ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﻜﺮار وﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮص‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪/‬اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Chapter‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Title‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﻣﻦ اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 1.1/1.0‬أو‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ً‬
‫اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2.0‬ﺑﺪون وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ DVD-R/DVD-R DL/DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.(VR‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Track‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Image‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻷﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Movie‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮار اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة ﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ وﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮص‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪/‬اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬
‫*‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Title‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺼﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو رﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ )ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ أو‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮان أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﳌﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﻘﺮص‪/‬اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ :DVD‬اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ*‬
‫ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD*2‬ﻗﺮص ‪ :CD/MP3/WMA/AAC‬اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ :JPEG‬ﺻﻮرة‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ :DivX/MPEG-4‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ذﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﻓ ًﺮا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﺑﺪون وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ )ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ )اﻟﻌﻨﻮان أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Visual‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪"DVD Direct Search‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪ "Chapter‬أو "‪."Title‬‬
‫اﻛﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Disc‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"OFF‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Album‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫— ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫*‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ DVD-R/DVD-R DL/DVD-RW‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪.(VR‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ أﺣﺪ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ ،‬أو ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻮد اﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه ﻣﺴﺒ ًﻘﺎ ﻛﻌﻤﺮ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ ﺣﻈﺮ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﳌﻘ ّﻴﺪة‬
‫أو اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ مبﺸﺎﻫﺪ أﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Visual‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪DVD Parental‬‬
‫‪."Control‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻋﺪاد ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹﻋﺎدة إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫اﻛﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Clear‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ وﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ وﺗﻘﻴﻴامت اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Visual‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪."DVD Parental Area‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻴﻴامت اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"Other‬أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﱪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه‬
‫ﻣﻦ ”ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﻮز اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،69‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬اﳌﺲ "‪."DVD Parental Rating‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠام اﻧﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻌﺪد‪ ،‬ﻛﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ أﻗﻮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اﻛﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Back‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬أﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "Parental Unlocked‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫"‪ "Repeat‬أو "‪ "Shuffle‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﳌﺮور‬
‫أﻟﻎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮور ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪Dolby D Level 0‬‬
‫‪Play Menu‬‬
‫‪SHUF‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪Adjust‬‬
‫‪Shuffle‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Control‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر أو اﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪ ،DVD‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص مبﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪DVD/‬‬
‫‪ ،DivX‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل‪Dolby ،‬‬
‫‪.(Digital‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."DVD Control‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Audio‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Dolby D 3/2.1‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪،VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ أو اﻟﻴﴪى ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع ﻋﱪ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺘني اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ واﻟﻴﴪى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ اﻹﺷﺎرة إﱃ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"2-Ch‬ﺻﻮت اﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ )اﻓﱰاﴈ(‬
‫"‪ :"L-Ch‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﴪى )ﺻﻮت أﺣﺎدي(‬
‫"‪ :"R-Ch‬ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺻﻮت أﺣﺎدي(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪1: English‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ "Stereo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪Top Menu‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪Play Menu‬‬
‫‪SHUF‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Control‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫أرﻗﺎم ﻗﻨﻮات‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻮل ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑني اﻟﻠﻐﺎت اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر اﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (69‬ﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺗني أو أﻛرث‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ وأرﻗﺎم اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪Dolby Digital 5.1 ch :‬‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ × ‪2‬‬
‫‪Dolby D 3 / 2 . 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮن ‪LFE × 1‬‬
‫اﳌﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ × ‪ + 2‬اﳌﻜﻮن‬
‫اﳌﺮﻛﺰي × ‪1‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻗﺮص ‪ ،DVD‬اﳌﺲ "‪."DVD Control‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ "Audio‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴري ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (AUDIO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر( ً‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫— ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ‪Dolby D‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻘﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،Dolby Digital‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﺮوق ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑني اﻟﻘﺮص واﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﳌﺮﺑﻊ "‪ "Adjust‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."ON‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ –‪ +/‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺨﺮج‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺨﺮج ﻗﺎﺑ ًﻼ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬ﺑني‬
‫‪ –10‬و ‪.+10‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Play Menu‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪ "Audio‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Play Menu‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪PTY‬‬
‫‪ 1‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ‪ ،FM‬اﳌﺲ "‪."PTY List‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ PTY‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إرﺳﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪.(PTY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﱪ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.v/V‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ ﻧﻮع اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻮع اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪ ،PTY‬اﳌﺲ "‪."PTY List‬‬
‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ‬
‫"‪) "News‬أﺧﺒﺎر(‪) "Current Affairs" ،‬أﺣﺪاث‬
‫ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ(‪) "Information" ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت(‪"Sport" ،‬‬
‫)رﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪) "Education" ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ(‪"Drama" ،‬‬
‫)دراﻣﺎ(‪) "Cultures" ,‬ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺔ(‪) "Science" ،‬ﻋﻠﻮم("‬
‫"‪) "Varied Speech‬ﻣﺘﻨﻮع(‪"Pop Music" ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺒﻮب(‪) "Rock Music" ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺮوك(‪،‬‬
‫"‪) "Easy Listening‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪] .M.O.R‬اﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ[(‪) “Light Classics M" ،‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫"‪) "Serious Classics‬ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺎدة(‪Other" ،‬‬
‫‪) "Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ أﺧﺮى(‪"Weather & Metr" ،‬‬
‫)ﻃﻘﺲ(‪) "Finance" ،‬ﻣﺎل(‪"Children’s Progs" ،‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﻃﻔﺎل(‪) "Social Affairs" ،‬ﺷﺌﻮن اﺟﺘامﻋﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫"‪) "Religion‬دﻳﻦ(‪) "Phone In" ،‬اﳌﺸﺎرﻛﺔ ﻋﱪ‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪)"Travel & Touring" ،‬ﺳﻔﺮ واﻟﱰﺣﺎل(‪،‬‬
‫"‪) "Leisure & Hobby‬اﻟﱰﻓﻴﻪ(‪"Jazz Music" ،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺠﺎز(‪) "Country Music" ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺮﻳﻒ(‪،‬‬
‫"‪) "National Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ وﻃﻨﻴﺔ(‪Oldies" ،‬‬
‫‪) "Music‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﻘﺪميﺔ(‪)"Folk Music" ،‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ(‪) "Documentary" ،‬وﺛﺎﺋﻘﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان‪/‬اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪.PTY‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ رادﻳﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪(CT‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "CT‬ﻋﲆ "‪ "ON‬ﰲ اﻹﻋﺪاد )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (CT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪.(RDS‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑني اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ وﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (CT‬واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻔﻌﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ — اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪(PBC‬‬
‫— اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪم ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ (PBC‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻨام ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪."PBC Panel‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."Enter‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻹرﺷﺎدات اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.O‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Close‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪(PBC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Visual‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﳌﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ v/V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪"Video CD PBC‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪."OFF‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪.VCD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ (PBC‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ وإﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ ،(PBC‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ رﻗﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ أو‬
‫ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﻌﺮض أو ﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض ﻏري ﻣﺘﺎح أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻴﺰة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(PBC‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷﻗﺮاص ذات ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DTS‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت إذا ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DTS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ —اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت واﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ذاﻛﺮة أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪ (BTM‬ﳌﻨﻊ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ —ذاﻛﺮة أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ )‪(BTM‬‬
‫‪RDS‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ‪ FM‬اﳌﺰودة ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫)‪ (RDS‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻏري ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ إﺷﺎرة ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Tuner‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Band‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)"‪ "FM1‬أو "‪ "FM2‬أو "‪ "FM3‬أو "‪ "AM1‬أو‬
‫"‪.("AM2‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Preset List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."BTM‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﱰددات ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت ﺻﻔري ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪PTY‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Preset‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Receive‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪Band‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪوﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫"‪."Preset List‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Memory‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ وﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪد اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ "‪."Preset List‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻄﻠﻮب )ﻣﻦ "‪ "P1‬إﱃ "‪.("P6‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪ A‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬اﻟﱰدد‬
‫‪ B‬اﺳﱰﻳﻮ*‪ ،1‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪2*(RDS‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﺳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ D‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ‪.FM‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪.(RDS‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪(RDS‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪ (RDS‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻛام ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪) PTY‬أﻧﻮاع اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﻧﻮع اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺣﺎﻟ ًﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻛام ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮع‬
‫اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﺤﺪد‪.‬‬
‫‪) CT‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (CT‬اﻟﻮاردة ﻣﻦ إرﺳﺎل ﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪ (RDS‬ﻋﲆ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺟﻤﻴﻊ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪ (RDS‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ‪/‬اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪ (RDS‬إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻮة اﻹﺷﺎرة ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ أو‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺆﴍات‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺆﴍات دامئًﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Play Menu‬‬
‫‪SHUF‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪Control‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫'‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ZAP‬‬
‫‪Album‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫&‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Play Menu‬‬
‫‪SHUF‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ A‬رﻣﺰ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫‪ C‬اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﴤ*‪ ،2‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻷﻟﺒﻮم )اﳌﺠﻠﺪ(‪/‬اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ*‪ ،4*3‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت*‪ ،5‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪(RBE ،EQ7 ،CSO‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﴤ‬
‫‪ E‬اﺳﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم‪ ،‬اﺳﻢ اﻟﻔﻨﺎن‬
‫*‪6‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮم‬
‫*‪7‬‬
‫‪ G‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﻷﻟﺒﻮم ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫)‪(RBE ،EQ7 ،CSO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫*‪4‬‬
‫*‪5‬‬
‫*‪6‬‬
‫*‪7‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ ،ATT‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ‪ JPEG‬أو ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،PBC‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ أي ﻣﺆﴍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺆﴍات ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص‪/‬اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) PBC‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(22‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫أي ﻣﺆﴍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD/DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﱰاوح اﻟﺤﺠﻢ اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 240 × 240‬إﱃ ‪ 960 × 960‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ MP3/WMA/AAC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻹﺟﺮاء‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫>‪./‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻹﺟﺮاء إرﺟﺎع‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ )‪ .1*(× 2… T × 120 T × 12 T × 2‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪.u‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻹﺟﺮاء إرﺟﺎع‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ > ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺮر اﳌﻔﺘﺎح‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫"‪"Play Menu‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫"‪"DVD Control‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪) "Repeat"/"Shuffle‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(24‬‬
‫• "‪) "Dolby D Level‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬
‫• "‪) "Stereo‬ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪ VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬
‫• "‪) "Image Turn‬ﻋﺮض ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬اﳌﺲ ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرة ﻳﺴﺎ ًرا‪/‬ميﻴﻨًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪) "Audio‬ﻋﺮض ‪ DivX/MPEG-4‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬
‫• "‪) "Subtitle‬ﻋﺮض ‪ DivX‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫*‪3*2‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻗﺮص ‪ ،DVD‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Audio‬اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪) .‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Subtitle‬اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫*‪3*2‬‬
‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Angle‬اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﺘﻐﻴري زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪2*.DVD‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Top Menu‬اﳌﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Menu‬اﳌﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫"‪"PBC Panel‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫"‪+/– "Album‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫"‪"List‬‬
‫‪qa‬‬
‫"‪"ZAP‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ‪) .PBC‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ أﻟﺒﻮم )ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/DivX/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) .‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) .ZAPPIN‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ أو ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺘﺎح ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر اﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ 4‬أرﻗﺎم‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (69‬ﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫إذا اﺣﺘﻮى اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﲆ أﻧﻮاع ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ اﳌﺤﺪد )ﺻﻮت‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة( ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻠﻒ" ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.33‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻋﺮض ‪JPEG‬‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﺻﻮرة ذات ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒري‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ وﻗﺘًﺎ أﻃﻮل‪.‬‬
‫ﺤﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ JPEG‬ا ُﳌ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
.‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت‬/‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
Source List
ATT
Source List
Top
DVD
Control
15
ATT
Top
DVD
Control
Play Menu
SHUF
15
12:00
Play Menu
SHUF
12:00
MPEG-4
Source List
ATT
Top
List
Source List
ATT
Top
Play Menu
SHUF
PBC Panel
Play Menu
SHUF
Album
15
12:00
15
12:00
Source List
ATT
Top
ZAP
List
Play Menu
SHUF
Album
15
12:00
RB
‫اﳌﺲ ﻹﺟﺮاء‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
(11 ‫ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬.‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺼﺪر‬
.‫ اﳌﺲ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬،‫ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬.‫ﺧﻔﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
"Source List"
1
"ATT"
2
(11 ‫ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬.‫ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
"Top"
3
18
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ أو ﻣﻘﻴﺪة‪.‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص )ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﲆ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻏﻼق اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ واﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﳌﺲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼف ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﴫ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ .‬اﳌﺲ‬
‫‪ b/v/V/B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﳌﺆﴍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ "‪ "Enter‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﻇﻬﻮر ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻋﱪ ﳌﺲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻗﺎمئﺔ أﻗﺮاص ‪DVD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺴام إﱃ ﻋﺪة أﻗﺴﺎم‪ ،‬وﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن إﺣﺪى ﻣﻴﺰات اﻟﺼﻮرة أو اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻷﻗﺴﺎم "اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ"‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺮﻏﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﺮص ‪ .DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮاص ‪ DVD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﻐﺎت( اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎمئﺔ ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻘﺮص ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪأ ﻋﺮض اﻟﴩاﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﳌﺪة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻷﻗﺮاص ذات ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DTS‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DTS‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ Z‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻹﻏﻼق اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻏﻼق اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪PTY‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Preset‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Receive‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻹﺟﺮاء‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪"Source List‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫"‪"ATT‬‬
‫"‪"Top‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪m/M‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫>‪./‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫"‪"Band‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫"‪"Receive Menu‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪Band‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﻨﴫ‬
‫‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺼﺪر‪) .‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(11‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪) .‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(11‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﱰددات ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ وﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Mono‬اﳌﺴﻪ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ ﺻﻮت أﺣﺎدي ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﻣﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ .FM‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."OFF‬‬
‫• "‪ :"Local‬اﳌﺲ ﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ذات اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "‪."OFF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ أو ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت‪) .‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ ‪) .PTY‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬
‫‪"Preset List" 8‬‬
‫‪"PTY List" 9‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍات أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫"‬
‫‪ A‬رﻣﺰ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺤﺎﱄ*‬
‫‪ B‬رﻗﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ* ‪ ،‬اﻟﱰدد‪/‬اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت*‬
‫‪ D‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )‪(RBE ،EQ7 ،CSO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫‪PTY‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Preset‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Receive‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Band‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺔ ا ُﳌﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ ،ATT‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ ،"Source List‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Tuner‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "AV Source‬ﺛﻢ "‪."Tuner‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪BTM‬‬
‫‪P3‬‬
‫‪P2‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪Memory‬‬
‫‪P6‬‬
‫‪P5‬‬
‫‪P4‬‬
‫‪PTY‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Preset‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Receive‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪Band‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪."Band‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AM2‬‬
‫‪PTY‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪AM1‬‬
‫‪Preset‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Receive‬‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪FM3‬‬
‫‪FM2‬‬
‫‪Band‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪FM1‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )"‪ "FM1‬أو "‪ "FM2‬أو "‪ "FM3‬أو "‪ "AM1‬أو "‪.("AM2‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ "‪ "Band‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫اﳌﺲ >‪../‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﺣﺪى اﳌﺤﻄﺎت‪ .‬ﻛﺮر ﻫﺬا اﻹﺟﺮاء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻳﺪوﻳًﺎ‬
‫اﳌﺲ ‪ m/M‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﱰدد اﳌﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﱰددات ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ‪ m/M‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻷول ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬أو ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‬
‫أو ﺗﻐﻴري اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (10‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪق اﻟﺮأس‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ اﻟﺤﱪ اﻟﺠﺎف‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆدي اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ إﱃ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ وﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ا ُﳌﺨﺰّﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Initial Setting‬‬
‫‪OFF / ON‬‬
‫‪Subwoofer‬‬
‫‪Front L / Front R‬‬
‫‪Listening Position‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Subwoofer‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪ "ON‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‪ ،‬أو‬
‫"‪ "OFF‬إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Listening Position‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ "‪ "Front L‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع أﻣﺎﻣ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫أﻳﴪ‪ ،‬أو ﻋﲆ "‪ "Front R‬إذا ﻛﺎن أﻣﺎﻣ ًﻴﺎ أميﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﳌﺲ "‪ "Language‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )اﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫اﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺮوﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬اﳌﺲ "‪."OK‬‬
‫اﻛﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ إﺿﺎﰲ ﰲ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺗﺤﺴني اﻟﺼﻮت ﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع — ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ" ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.45‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.50‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷول ﻣﺮة‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎزﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ J‬اﻷزرار >‪.m/M‬‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮر ﻋﲆ إﺣﺪى اﳌﺤﻄﺎت ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص*‪:USB/2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻹﺟﺮاء إرﺟﺎع‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻹﺟﺮاء إرﺟﺎع‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ ﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت ‪:3*Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ إﺣﺪى اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻹﺟﺮاء إرﺟﺎع‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ ﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪1‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫*‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.PBC‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻘﺮص )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻧﻄﻔﺄت اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺎ مل ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ أو ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﺮص ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أوﻻً‪.‬‬
‫‪ K‬أزرار ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺮص ‪DVD‬‬
‫)‪:(AUDIO‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪VCD/CD/MP3/WMA/AAC/‬‬
‫‪ ،MPEG-4‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت‪(.‬‬
‫)‪:(SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﱰﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪:(ANGLE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫)‪:(TOP MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫)‪:(MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ أﺣﺪ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪.‬‬
‫‪ L‬اﻟﺰر ‪ZAP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل ﰲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ™‪.ZAPPIN‬‬
‫‪ M‬اﻷزرار ‪) </M/m/,‬اﳌﺆﴍ(‪ ENTER/‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪ N‬اﻟﺰر ‪) SRC‬اﳌﺼﺪر(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﺼﺪر‪) "Tuner" :‬اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ(‪،"Disc" ،‬‬
‫"‪) "AUX‬اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ(‪، "USB/iPod" ،‬‬
‫"‪) "BT Audio‬ﺻﻮت ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ O‬اﻟﺰر ‪MODE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )‪/(FM/AM‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫أﺣﺪ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ )‪.4*(AUX1/AUX2‬‬
‫‪ P‬اﻷزرار ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪–/+‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮاز ‪RM-X170‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‬
‫‪RB‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪RT‬‬
‫‪RE‬‬
‫‬
‫‪RG‬‬
‫‬
‫‪RH‬‬
‫‬
‫‪RI‬‬
‫• ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫• راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻌﺎزﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام )اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪ A‬اﻟﺰر ‪OFF‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬اﻟﺰر ‪MONITOR OFF‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وإﺿﺎءة اﻷزرار‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬اﻟﺰر ‪POSITION‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع )"‪Front"/"Front L‬‬
‫‪.("OFF"/"Custom"/"All"/ "Front"/"R‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ D‬اﻟﺰر ‪) O‬ﻋﻮدة(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬اﻟﻌﻮدة إﱃ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻗﺮص ‪.1*VCD‬‬
‫‪ E‬اﻟﺰر ‪) EQ‬ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺑني ‪ 7‬أﻧﻮاع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫)"‪/"Space"/"Cruise"/"Edge"/"Vocal"/"Xplod‬‬
‫"‪.("OFF"/"Custom"/"Gravity‬‬
‫‪ F‬أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮص‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز ‪:USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪ G‬اﻟﺰر ‪CLEAR‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬف رﻗﻢ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ H‬اﻟﺰر ‪) ATT‬ا ُﳌﺨ ّﻔﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ I‬اﻟﺰر ‪) u‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪"Source List‬‬
‫ﻋﺮوض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أي ﻣﺼﺪر‪:‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‪Source List‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪"Top‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪57 ،53‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح )إﻏﻼق(‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼق اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪) "ATT‬ا ُﳌﺨ ّﻔﺾ(*‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬اﳌﺲ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح )اﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ G‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪) "M.OFF‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وإﺿﺎءة اﻷزرار‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫اﳌﺲ أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ H‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪"AV Source‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫ ‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪ J‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﳌﺼﺪر‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴري اﳌﺼﺪر‪) "Tuner" :‬اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ(‪"AUX" ،"Disc" ،‬‬
‫)اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ(‪،"SensMe™" ،"USB/iPod" ،‬‬
‫"‪) "BT Audio‬ﺻﻮت ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪M.OFF‬‬
‫‪BT Phone‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "‪"BT Phone‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ اﳌﺼﺎدر‪.‬‬
‫‪AV Source‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﳌﺼﺪر‪:‬‬
‫ ‬
‫‬
‫‪Top‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ATT‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫‪Tuner‬‬
‫‪BT Audio‬‬
‫™‪SensMe‬‬
‫‪USB/iPod‬‬
‫‪12:00‬‬
‫‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ووﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫‪TOP‬‬
‫ ‬
‫‪VOL‬‬
‫ ‬
‫راﺟﻊ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ اﻷﻗﺮاص )ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﻠﻒ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ( اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﺼﺪر‪"Tuner" :‬‬
‫)اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ(‪) "Disc" ،"AUX" ،‬اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ(‪USB/" ،‬‬
‫‪) "BT Audio"، "iPod‬ﺻﻮت ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ D‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﳌﺪة ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﳌﺪة ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘني ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫)‪ (Bluetooth‬ﻣﺆﴍ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ G‬اﻟﺰر ‪TOP‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ H‬اﻟﺰر ‪SOURCE/OFF‬‬
‫‪ B‬أزرار ‪) VOL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت( –‪*+/‬‬
‫‪ E‬زر إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪ I‬زر ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬إﻏﻼق( اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪17‬‬
‫* ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﺰر ‪ + VOL‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﳌﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ واﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻗﺮاص ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪك اﳌﺨﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺗﺪﻋﻢ أﺣﺪ اﻷﻗﺮاص‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻘﺮص‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻘﺮص ﰲ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪*DVD-R / *DVD-R DL / 1*DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬وﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪*DVD+R / 1*DVD+R DL / 1*DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‬
‫)اﻹﺻﺪار ‪(2.0/1.1/1.0‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻗﺮص ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‬
‫‪*CD-ROM / 2*CD-R / 2*CD-RW‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫*‪ 1‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر ً‬
‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام "‪ "DVD‬ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎم ﻷﻗﺮاص ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬و‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬و ‪.DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض اﳌﺨﻄﻂ اﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ وأﻧﻮاع اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﻣﻮز اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ أدﻧﺎه ﺑﺠﻮار وﺻﻒ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﰲ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮيت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮيت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮيت ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AAC‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ®‪DivX‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮل ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.60‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮوف ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ SONY‬اﳌﺴﺆوﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄي ﺣﺎل ﻣﻦ اﻷﺣﻮال ﺗﺠﺎه أﻳﺔ‬
‫أﴐار ﻃﺎرﺋﺔ أو ﻏري ﻣﺒﺎﴍة أو ﻻﺣﻘﺔ أو ﻏري ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻷﴐار اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﳌﺜﺎل ﻻ اﻟﺤﴫ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴﺎرة اﻷرﺑﺎح أو اﻹﻳﺮادات أو‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت أو اﻟﺨﺴﺎرة اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻨﺘﺞ أو أي أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺔ أو ﻓﱰة اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻊ وﻗﺖ اﻟﴩاء اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ أو اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ أو ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ و‪/‬أو ﺑﺮاﻣﺠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫إﺧﻄﺎر ﻫﺎم!‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆدي اﻟﺘﻐﻴريات أو اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮأ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻏري‬
‫اﳌﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ ﴏاﺣ ًﺔ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Sony‬إﱃ إﺑﻄﺎل اﻟﺘﺨﻮﻳﻞ اﳌﻤﻨﻮح‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎءات‪ ،‬ا ُﳌﺤﺪدة وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت واﻟﻘﻴﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﰲ اﺳﺘﻌامل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬
‫راﺟﻊ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧني واﻟﻠﻮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫واﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﰲ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮد‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻨﺢ ﻋﲆ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ وﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫وﺟﻪ اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ دامئًﺎ إﱃ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة َ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ أو اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ إذا ﺗﻄﻠﺒﺖ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄي ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮاءة دﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﺎص‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﱰدد اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ إﺷﺎرات ﺗﺮدد اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻏري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ أو اﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏري ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرات‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ أﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﻮد اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺔ أو أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮاﻣﻞ اﳌﻘﺎوﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺰﻻق )اﻻﻧﻐﻼق( اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺔ أو أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻹﻟﻜﱰوﻧﻴﺔ أو أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﺪ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أو‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة أو ﻣﻦ ميﺜﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ميﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ أو اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺧﻄ ًﺮا ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ وﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ أي ﺿامن ﻣﻤﻨﻮح‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﴩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ أن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮي‬
‫داﺧﻞ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻬﺎ اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻣﻦ أن ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﰲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ وﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳامﻋﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎرة واﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﱪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫واﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ واﻷرﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎم‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﱪﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﰲ ﻇﻞ ﻛﻞ اﻟﻈﺮوف‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ أي ﺟﻬﺎز إﻟﻜﱰوين وﺣﺪه ﻹﺟﺮاء اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻻت اﻟﻄﻮارئ اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ أﻧﻪ ﻹﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت أو ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴامﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻼمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻏري اﳌﻤﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎت اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ أو ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ و‪/‬‬
‫أو ﻣﻴﺰات اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﳌﺤﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ مبﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﱰاع ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة وﺣﻘﻮق اﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫وﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ﻫﺬه‬
‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،Macrovision‬وﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻌﺪة ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت ﰲ اﳌﻨﺰل‬
‫وﰲ ﺣﺎﻻت اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺤﺪود وذﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺎ مل ﺗﻘﻢ ‪Macrovision‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺨﻼف ذﻟﻚ‪ .‬وﻳﺤﻈﺮ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ أو‬
‫اﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ُ .Dolby Laboratories‬ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫"‪ "Dolby‬وﺷﻌﺎر ‪ D‬اﳌﺰدوج ﻋﻼﻣﺘني ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺘني ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎرات ‪ Microsoft‬و‬
‫‪ Windows‬و‪ Windows Vista‬و‬
‫‪ Windows Media‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫أو ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺒﻠﺪان‬
‫اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻛام ﺗﻌﺪ "‪ "DVD VIDEO‬و"‪ "DVD-R‬و"‪"DVD-RW‬‬
‫و"‪ "DVD+R‬و"‪ "DVD+RW‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﺗﻌﺪ ®‪ DivX‬و®‪DivX Certified‬‬
‫واﻟﺸﻌﺎرات اﳌﻘﱰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.DivX, Inc.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆول ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬وﺷﻌﺎراﺗﻬﺎ إﱃ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬وأي اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Sony Corporation‬ﻳﺘﻢ مبﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬وﺗﻌﺪ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ واﻷﺳامء اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ اﳌﻌﻨﻴني‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ ZAPPIN‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪12 TONE ANALYSIS‬‬
‫وﺷﻌﺎرﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫‪.Corporation‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ "‪"WALKMAN‬‬
‫وﺷﻌﺎر"‪ "WALKMAN‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫‪.Corporation‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ واﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ذات اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫®‪ Gracenote. Gracenote‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺮف‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ وﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ اﳌﺤﺘﻮى اﳌﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﺟﻮ زﻳﺎرة ‪.www.gracenote.com‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ واﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪Gracenote,‬‬
‫‪ ،Inc.‬ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ©‪ - 2010-2000‬ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Gracenote‬ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎت ‪ ،Gracenote‬ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫©‪ - 2010-2000‬ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ .Gracenote‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫أو ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺮاءة اﺧﱰاع واﺣﺪة أو أﻛرث متﻠﻜﻬﺎ ‪.Gracenote‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء زﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻋﲆ اﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﻟﻼﻃﻼع ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎمئﺔ‬
‫ﻏري ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﱪاءات اﺧﱰاﻋﺎت ‪ Gracenote‬اﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إن ‪ ،Gracenote، CDDB، MusicID‬ﺷﻌﺎر ‪Gracenote‬‬
‫وﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺸﻌﺎر وﺷﻌﺎر "‪ "Powered by Gracenote‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫إﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ أو ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Gracenote‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺪول اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ Sony‬ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Monotype Imaging Inc.‬أو اﻟﴩﻛﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ iPod‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﴩﻛﺔ ‪ ،Apple Inc.‬وﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة واﻟﺒﻠﺪان اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Apple‬و‪ Macintosh‬و‪ iTunes‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ ،Apple Inc.‬وﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة واﻟﺒﻠﺪان اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻮع مبﻮﺟﺐ اﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4 VISUAL‬‬
‫‪ PATENT PORTFOLIO‬وﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌامل اﻟﺸﺨﴢ وﻏري‬
‫اﻟﺘﺠﺎري ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺷﻔﺮة ‪ MPEG-4 VIDEO‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔريﻫﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ وﻏري ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ و‪/‬‬
‫أو ﻛﺎن ﺗﻢ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ MPEG LA‬ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ‪ .MPEG-4 VIDEO‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻴﺰ أو ﻳﺪل ﺿﻤﻨًﺎ ﻋﲆ اﻻﺳﺘﻌامل ﰲ أي ﻏﺮض آﺧﺮ ميﻜﻦ‪ .‬اﻟﺤﺼﻮل‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﱰوﻳﺠﻴﺔ واﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﱰاﺧﻴﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ .MPEG LA, LLC.‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ‪ SensMe‬وﺷﻌﺎر ‪ SensMe‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪Sony Ericsson Mobile‬‬
‫‪.Communications AB‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• اﻟﺘﺰم ﺑﻘﻮاﻋﺪ اﳌﺮور واﻟﻘﻮاﻧني واﻟﻠﻮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﻊ إﱃ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﺘﺖ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ وﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدﺛﺔ‪ .‬أوﻗﻒ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫آﻣﻦ ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻴﺰة اﻹﻋﺪاد أو أي وﻇﻴﻔﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫وﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺔ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ وﺣﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ أو أﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ أو ً‬
‫ﺟﺴام ﻏﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮوح أو إﺗﻼف‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫– أﺑﻖ اﻷدوات اﻟﺼﻐرية ﺑﻌﻴﺪًا ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ رﺑﻂ أﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎن ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮوح ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﳌﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة وﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮاﻣﻞ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺑﺪأت اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﰲ اﻟﺘﺤﺮك أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮل‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ إﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫"‪"Video blocked for your safety.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮف ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﱃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وﻟﻜﻦ ميﻜﻦ ﺳامع ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﻧﻮﴆ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ أو ﻣﻮﻇﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– إذا ﺣﺎوﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮاﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ وﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻏري اﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ إﱃ اﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎد ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو‬
‫ﺣﺪوث داﺋﺮة ﻗﴫ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا مل ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت أوﻻً‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬أﻣﺎ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻛﻞ ﳾء‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ اﳌﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ اﳌﻮاد اﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﺒﻴﺪات‬
‫اﻟﺤﴩﻳﺔ أو اﳌﻮاد اﻟﺮﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺮ أو اﳌﻮاد اﻟﻄﺎردة ﻟﻠﺤﴩات‬
‫وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﱰك اﳌﻮاد اﳌﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻔﱰة‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬وإﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺴﺪ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة أو ﻳﺤﺪث‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮه ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك إﱃ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎد اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو إﱃ ﺣﺪوث داﺋﺮة ﻗﴫ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﴬر ﺑﺄي ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ أﺟﺰاء‬
‫اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﻮاﺳري أو اﻷﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ أو ﺧﺰان اﻟﻮﻗﻮد أو اﻷﺳﻼك‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أداة ﺛﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫أو وﻗﻮع ﺣﺎدﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻷﻗﺮاص‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/AAC/JPEG/‬‬
‫‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DivX®/MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMA‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAC‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JPEG‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DivX‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺟﻬﺎز ‪61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPod‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﻷﺧﻄﺎء وإﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎت ﻋﺮض‪/‬رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻗﺎمئﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪/‬رﻣﺰ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻬﺮس‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎؤﻻت أو ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ أﺣﺪث ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺪﻋﻢ اﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬا‬
‫اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎرة ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻮﻳﺐ أدﻧﺎه‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/section/support‬‬
‫‪http://www.sony-asia.com/caraudio‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل‪:‬‬
‫• ﻃﺮز وﺟﻬﺎت ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﻃﺮز وﺟﻬﺎت ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ واﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺣﻮل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﻴﺪة‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫— ‪33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬ﺻﻮرة‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻠﻒ ‪33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫— ™‪33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZAPPIN‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎرة ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ وﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت —‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫اﻹﺟﺮاء اﻷﺳﺎﳼ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻃﺮاز ‪35 . . . . . . . . XA-MC10‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء إﺣﺪى اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫إدارة دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض دﻓﱰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮي ‪. . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﺬف ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت دﻓﱰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫إدارة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎت اﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ُﻣﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪43 . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﺼﻮت‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴني اﻟﺼﻮت ﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫— ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ‪45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫— ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ‪46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت وإﻋﺪاد ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪. . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺳامﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫— ‪46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSO‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺴامﻋﺎت اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫— ‪46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RBE‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ ‪47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت — ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EQ7‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫— ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ‪44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ7‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮة ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫— ‪48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Picture EQ‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ‪48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع إﱃ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻷﺳﺎﳼ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻋﺮض ‪ DVD‬وإﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺧﺮى‪. . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ رﻣﺰ اﻷﻣﺎن ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫إﻋﺪادات ﻛﺎﻣريا اﳌﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ —اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ — (PBC‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻟﻐﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري ﻗﻨﺎة اﻟﺼﻮت ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫— ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ‪23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dolby D‬‬
‫اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ واﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ووﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮاز ‪. . . . . . . RM-X170‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫إﺟﺮاء اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص — ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮﻳﻦ ‪24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰة ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﻮاﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴري اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ وﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺒﺎﴍ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع إﱃ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ وﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺰاج‬
‫— ‪27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SensMeTM‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ™‪27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SensMe‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ "‪ "SensMeTM Setup‬و"‪"Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫"‪28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "SensMeTM Setup‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت إﱃ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫"‪28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Content Transfer‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‬
‫— ‪28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SensMe™ channels‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت ﰲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ اﳌﺰاج‬
‫— ‪30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SensMe™ mood‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ — اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺤﻄﺎت واﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ — ذاﻛﺮة أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻮاﻟﻔﺔ )‪. . . . . .(BTM‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺪو ًﻳﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﳌﺤﻄﺎت اﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RDS‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTY‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (CT‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪iPod‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iPod‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺘﻜﺮر واﻟﻌﺸﻮايئ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫— ﺗﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﻛﺎب ‪32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪T‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻘﻴﺎس‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﺗﺤﻘﻴ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﱰﻛﻴﺐ واﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ دﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أو اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﱃ اﻷﻣﻄﺎر أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺸﺄن إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻌﺪات ﺑﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪوث‬
‫أﴐار ﺑﺎﻟﻌني‪ .‬وﻷن ﺷﻌﺎع اﻟﻠﻴﺰر اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﰲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ أﻗﺮاص‬
‫‪ CD/DVD‬ﺿﺎر ﻟﻠﻌني‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺤﺎول ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺸﺄن إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﰲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮل ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮم‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮارة اﳌﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة‬
‫أو اﻟﻨﺎر أو ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺣﺘﻮاء ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪ACC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‬
‫)اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ وﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺤﺪد‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣام ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎد‬
‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر )‪ (SOURCE/OFF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﻧﻈﺎم إﺷﻌﺎل اﳌﺤﺮك‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )‪ ،(Demo‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.53‬‬
AV Center
AR
‫إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
XAV-70BT
http://www.sony.net/
Sony Corporation Printed in Thailand
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement